DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or tablet
to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere.
Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store
and Google Play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlEoadn.
Table of Contents
Notices.......................................................................................... xv
Wireless ........................................................................................ xx
Introduction
Using the Touch Screen............................................................. 17
First Steps..................................................................................... 27
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
38
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder .......................................... 39
Framing Photos in the Monitor................................................ 45
Recording Movies....................................................................... 50
Viewing Movies.................................................................................... 52
Deleting Unwanted Movies............................................................. 53
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation
(Scene Mode)
k Portrait........................................................................................ 55
p Child ............................................................................................ 55
m Sports .......................................................................................... 56
u Sunset ......................................................................................... 58
0 Food.............................................................................................. 60
Special Effects
T Pop............................................................................................. 62
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More on Photography
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:
Focus Lock............................................................................................. 86
Manual Focus....................................................................................... 88
Image Quality....................................................................................... 90
Image Size ............................................................................................. 92
Interval Timer Photography................................................... 101
Remote Control Photography ............................................... 107
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control .............................. 107
Restoring Default Settings ..................................................... 110
P, S, A, and M Modes
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure.................................................................................... 125
Metering.............................................................................................. 125
Preset Manual.................................................................................... 142
Bracketing................................................................................. 148
Live View
Recording and Viewing Movies
Movie Settings................................................................................... 177
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback and Deletion
Viewing Pictures....................................................................... 188
Full-Frame Playback......................................................................... 188
Thumbnail Playback ........................................................................ 190
Photo Information ................................................................... 192
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 200
Rating Pictures.......................................................................... 203
Rating Individual Pictures.............................................................. 203
Deleting Photographs............................................................. 205
The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 206
Slide Shows ............................................................................... 208
Slide Show Options.......................................................................... 209
Connections
Installing ViewNX 2.................................................................. 210
Using ViewNX 2 ........................................................................ 211
Copy Pictures to the Computer................................................... 211
Printing Photographs.............................................................. 214
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...................................... 218
Viewing Pictures on TV ........................................................... 220
Standard Definition Devices......................................................... 220
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wi-Fi
Camera Menus
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Settings................................................................................ 247
Reset Custom Settings ............................................................ 248
a: Autofocus ................................................................................... 248
a1: AF-C Priority Selection...................................................... 248
a2: Number of Focus Points................................................... 249
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator .......................................... 250
b: Exposure..................................................................................... 252
b2: ISO Display............................................................................ 252
c: Timers/AE Lock ......................................................................... 252
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .......................................... 252
c2: Auto off Timers.................................................................... 253
c3: Self-Timer .............................................................................. 254
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3).......................................... 254
d: Shooting/Display..................................................................... 254
d1: Exposure Delay Mode....................................................... 254
d2: File Number Sequence..................................................... 255
d3: Viewfinder Grid Display ................................................... 256
d4: Date Stamp........................................................................... 256
d5: Reverse Indicators.............................................................. 258
e: Bracketing/Flash ...................................................................... 259
e2: Auto Bracketing Set........................................................... 264
f: Controls........................................................................................ 265
f1: Assign Fn Button ................................................................. 265
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button................................................... 267
f3: Assign Touch Fn................................................................... 268
f4: Reverse Dial Rotation......................................................... 269
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language..................................................................................... 275
Trim................................................................................................ 291
Resize ............................................................................................ 292
Straighten.................................................................................... 296
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fisheye .......................................................................................... 297
Image Overlay ............................................................................ 300
Color Outline............................................................................... 302
Photo Illustration....................................................................... 303
Miniature Effect.......................................................................... 304
Selective Color............................................................................ 305
Painting......................................................................................... 307
Choosing a Menu.............................................................................. 309
O My Menu......................................................................................... 310
Technical Notes
Compatible Lenses................................................................... 314
Compatible CPU Lenses ................................................................. 314
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses ....................................................... 316
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting System
(CLS) .................................................................................................. 323
Other Accessories..................................................................... 330
Approved Memory Cards............................................................... 334
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter..................... 335
Caring for the Camera ............................................................. 337
Storage ................................................................................................. 337
Cleaning............................................................................................... 337
Image Sensor Cleaning................................................................... 338
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery/Display.................................................................................. 350
Shooting (P, S, A, M) .......................................................................... 354
Playback............................................................................................... 355
Miscellaneous.................................................................................... 357
Lenses................................................................................................... 377
Index .......................................................................................... 394
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this
equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the
product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all
warnings before using this Nikon product.
A
❚❚ WARNINGS
AKeep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
ATurn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter (available
separately), unplug the AC adapter
and remove the battery immediately,
taking care to avoid burns.
ADo not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Continued operation could result in
injury. After removing the battery,
take the equipment to a Nikon-
authorized service center for
inspection.
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
AUsing the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with your
eye to the viewfinder, care should be
taken not to put your finger in your
eye accidentally.
ADo not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment in
the presence of flammable gas, as
this could result in explosion or fire.
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AKeep out of reach of children
ADo not leave the product where it will be
exposed to extremely high
temperatures, such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight
Failure to observe this precaution
could cause damage or fire.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury. In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
choking hazard. Should a child
swallow any part of this equipment,
consult a physician immediately.
ADo not aim a flash at the operator of a
motor vehicle
ADo not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury. In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified
technician. Should the product break
open as the result of a fall or other
accident, remove the battery and/or
AC adapter and then take the product
to a Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in accidents.
AObserve caution when using the flash
• Using the camera with the flash in
close contact with the skin or other
objects could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. The flash should be no
less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from
the subject. Particular care should
be observed when photographing
infants.
ADo not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the
neck of an infant or child could result
in strangulation.
AAvoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care
ADo not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct contact
with the skin for extended periods
may result in low-temperature burns.
should be taken to avoid injury due to
broken glass and to prevent the liquid
crystal from the monitor touching the
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.
ADo not carry tripods with a lens or camera
attached
You could trip or accidentally strike
others, resulting in injury.
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AObserve proper precautions when
handling batteries
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration or
deformation.
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling
batteries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use
in this equipment.
AObserve proper precautions when
handling the charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in injury or
product malfunction due to fire or
electric shock.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
• Do not short the charger terminals.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and
damage to the charger.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to flame
or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage
to the product, be sure to remove
the battery when no charge
remains.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth. Continued use could
result in fire.
• Do not go near the charger during
thunderstorms. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in injury
or product malfunction due to fire
or electric shock.
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from
one voltage to another or with DC-
to-AC inverters. Failure to observe
this precaution could damage the
product or cause overheating or fire.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and store
in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the battery
to cool.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUse appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input
and output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
AFollow the instructions of airline and
hospital personnel
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
• No part of the manuals included
with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted,
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of
this product.
transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
language in any form, by any means, manuals is accurate and complete,
without Nikon’s prior written
permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change
the specifications of the hardware
and software described in these
manuals at any time and without
prior notice.
we would appreciate it were you to
bring any errors or omissions to the
attention of the Nikon
representative in your area (address
provided separately).
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be
This symbol on the bat-
tery indicates that the
battery is to be collected
separately.
collected separately.
The following apply only
to users in European
countries:
• This product is designated for
separate collection at an
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• Separate collection and recycling
helps conserve natural resources
dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
and prevent negative consequences charge of waste management.
for human health and the
environment that might result from
incorrect disposal.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit
is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
D5500
of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not
expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your
equipment. Using other interface
cables may exceed the limits of Class
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this
product may expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of
California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
• Increase the separation between
the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected. Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
• Consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/television
technician for help.
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied • Cautions on certain copies and
or reproduced
reproductions
The government has issued
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities,
government bonds, or local
government bonds, even if such
copies or reproductions are
stamped “Sample.”
cautions on copies or reproductions
of securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,
or coupon tickets, except when a
minimum of necessary copies are to
be provided for business use by a
company. Also, do not copy or
reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by
public agencies and private groups,
ID cards, and tickets, such as passes
and meal coupons.
The copying or reproduction of
paper money, coins, or securities
which are circulated in a foreign
country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
postage stamps or post cards issued
by the government is prohibited.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
photographs is governed by
national and international
The copying or reproduction of
stamps issued by the government
and of certified documents stipu-
lated by law is prohibited.
copyright laws. Do not use this
product for the purpose of making
illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any
transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Wi-Fi >
setup menu to delete any personal network information. Care should be
taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, ignit-
ing, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local autho-
rized Nikon dealer.
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its
operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES
COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages
or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-
line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips,
answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital
imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from
the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact
information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wireless
This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United
States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations
and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United
States embargoes goods. The following countries are currently subject to
embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria.
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions.
Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless
features of this product outside the country of purchase.
Notices for Customers in the U. S. A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation
may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices for Customers in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however,
that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power
Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many
studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some
studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such
findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The D5500, which
is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650/IC ID: 772C-LBYR650)
wireless LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Please refer
to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices for Customers in Europe
Hereby, Nikon Corporation, declares that the D5500 is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity
may be consulted at http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D5500.pdf
Notice for Customers in Singapore
Trade Name:
Model: D5500
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of
certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA103423
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely
connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the
following may occur if security is not enabled:
• Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to
steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.
• Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network
and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the
design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized
access even when security is enabled.
xxii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
6 7
8
5
4
3
2
1
9
19
10
11
12
13
14
18 17
16
15
Self-timer lamp.............................. 76
14 I/E/#
3
17 CPU contacts
18 Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote
Introduction
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 21 22
23 24 25
30
29
33
28
27
26
32
31
21 Accessory shoe (for optional flash
23 R (information)
31 USB and A/V
24 Command dial
32 Connector for external
26 Connector cover
D Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
D The Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on
the magnetic devices.
2
Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
34 35 36 37
38
39
40
41
49
50
51
47
46
45 44 43 42
52
41 Memory card access
optional power connector ...... 335
42 Battery-chamber cover
43 Battery-chamber cover
Introduction
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Viewfinder
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit
for illustrative purposes.
1
2
3
78 9 10
16
11 12 1314 15
4
5
6
17 18 20
19
21
1 Framing grid (displayed when On 13 Number of exposures
is selected for Custom Setting d3,
5 Monochrome indicator (displayed
in % mode or when the
Monochrome Picture Control or
a Picture Control based on
Monochrome is
remaining...................................... 34
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ..................... 73
White balance recording
indicator ...................................... 143
Exposure compensation
Flash compensation value........ 131
Capture mode indicator
8 Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator.......................................127
14 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 34
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 129
Electronic rangefinder............... 251
19 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 129
Introduction
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Monitor
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.
180°
90°
180°
Normal use: Fold the monitor
against the camera face out. The
monitor is normally used in this
position.
Low-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
up to take shots in live view with
the camera held low.
High-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
down to take shots in live view
with the camera held high.
Self-portraits: Use for self-portraits
in live view. The monitor shows
a mirror image of what will
appear in the final picture.
6
Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Using the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown. Do not use force.
Failure to observe these precautions could damage the camera or
monitor. To protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it
back face down against the camera body.
Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera.
Introduction
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Information Display
Viewing settings: To view the information
display, press the R button.
R button
10 11
1
4 5
6
7
8
9
2
3
12
1 Shooting mode
Flash compensation indicator for
optional flash units................... 328
i auto/
Scene modes ............................54
Special effects mode ..............61
Aperture display ......................... 114
Shutter-speed display ............... 114
Auto ISO sensitivity
Eye-Fi connection indicator ..... 284
indicator ...................................... 242
8
Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
14
17
18
19
15
16
20
22
21
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 34
14 Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator.......................................127
Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 129
Bracketing progress
18 Number of exposures
White balance recording
indicator ...................................... 151
indicator.......................................143
Capture mode indicator
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
A Info Display Auto Off
The eye sensor will automatically turn the info display off if you put
your eye to the viewfinder while the standby timer is active. The
display will turn on again when you remove your eye from the
viewfinder. If desired, you can prevent the information display turning
Note, however, that regardless of the option selected the information
display will turn off when the standby timer expires.
Introduction
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing settings: To change the settings at
the bottom of the display, press the P
button, then highlight items using the
multi selector and press J to view
options for the highlighted item. You can
also change settings by pressing the P
P button
3
4
5
2
1
6
7
14
13 12
11 10
9
8
2 Image size........................................92 10 Flash mode .............................. 94, 96
3 Auto bracketing .......................... 149 11 Metering....................................... 125
6 White balance ............................. 137 14 Picture Control ............................ 152
10 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or
press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 8 seconds (for
information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Auto off
sensor or look through the viewfinder.
Introduction 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Multi Selector
In this manual, operations using the multi selector are
represented by 1, 3, 4, and 2 icons.
1: Press the multi selector up
J button
4: Press the multi
2: Press the multi
selector left
selector right
3: Press the multi selector down
12 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Menus: An Overview
Most shooting, playback, and setup
options can be accessed from the camera
menus. To view the menus, press the
G button.
G button
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• m/O: Recent settings or My Menu
(defaults to Recent settings;
Current settings are shown by
icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
Introduction 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the
camera menus.
1: Move cursor up
J button: select
highlighted item
4: Cancel and
return to
previous
menu
2: Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
3: Move cursor down
A The d (Help) Icon
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, a
description of the currently selected option or menu can be displayed
by pressing the W (Q) button. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the
display. Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.
W (Q) button
14 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1
Display the menus.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
G button
2
3
Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4
Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
Introduction 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
7
8
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu item.
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option.
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit
without making a selection, press the G button.
Note the following:
•
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently
available.
•
While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J,
there are some cases in which selection can only be made by
pressing J.
•
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
16 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Touch Screen
The touch-sensitive monitor supports
the following operations:
Flick
Flick a finger a short distance across the
monitor.
Slide
Slide a finger over the monitor.
Stretch/Pinch
Place two fingers on the monitor and
move them apart or pinch them together.
Introduction 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D The Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond
when covered with third-party protective films or when touched with
fingernails or gloved hands. Do not use excessive force or touch the
screen with sharp objects.
D Using the Touch Screen
The touch screen may not respond as expected if you attempt to
operate it while leaving your palm or another finger resting on it in
second location. It may not recognize other gestures if your touch is
too soft, your fingers are moved too quickly or too short a distance or
do not remain in contact with the screen, or if the movement of the
two fingers in a pinch or stretch is not correctly coordinated.
A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls
controls for shooting, playback, and menu navigation or Playback
only to enable touch controls for playback only.
18 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touch-Screen Photography
Tap icons in the shooting display to adjust camera settings (note
that not all icons will respond to touch-screen operations).
During live view, you can also take photographs by tapping the
monitor.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography
Use the touch screen to adjust settings in the information
Scene/Effect Selection
shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect. Tap x or y to
view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to
the previous display.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
In modes S, A, and M, you can tap the w icon next to the shutter
speed or aperture displays to view x and y controls, which you
can tap to choose a new value. Tap 1 to exit when the operation
is complete.
Introduction 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shooting Options
right corner of the display and then tap icons to display options
for the corresponding setting. Tap the desired option to select it
and return to the previous display.
If prompted to choose a value as shown
at right, edit the value by tapping u or v
and then tap the number or tap 0 to
select it and return to the previous
display.
To exit without changing settings, tap
2.
20 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Live View Photography
The touch screen can be used to adjust settings and take
photographs.
Taking Photographs (Touch Shutter)
Touch the monitor to focus and lift your
finger to take the photograph.
Tap the icon shown at right to choose
the operation performed by tapping the
monitor in shooting mode. Choose
from the following options:
Option
Description
Touch the monitor to position the focus point
and focus (autofocus only; the touch shutter
can not be used to focus when MF—manual
3
(touch shutter on) focus—is selected for focus mode as
released when you lift your finger from the
screen.
As above, except that lifting your finger from
the screen does not release the shutter.
7 (touch shutter off)
Focus locks while your finger is on the monitor. During movie
recording, the touch shutter remains off (7) and you can
refocus at any time by touching your subject in the monitor; the
touch shutter options icon is not displayed.
Introduction 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Taking Pictures Using Tap Shooting Options
Avoid moving the camera when releasing the shutter. Camera
movement can result in blurred photographs.
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even
when the 3 icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are
active. Use the shutter-release button to take photographs in
shooting options can be used only to take pictures one at a time in
continuous shooting mode and can not be used to take photographs
during movie recording.
selected, you can focus on the current subject by tapping the monitor.
you touch the monitor and the timer starts when you lift your finger
from the screen. At default settings, the shutter is released about 10 s
after the timer starts; the delay and number of shots can be changed
Number of shots is greater than 1, the camera will automatically take
pictures one after the other until the selected number of shots is
recorded.
22 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scene/Effect Selection
shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect. Tap x or y to
view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to
the previous display.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
In modes S, A, and M, tapping the shutter speed or aperture
displays x and y controls, which you can tap to choose a new
value. Tap 1 to exit when the operation is complete.
Introduction 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shooting Options
In live view, pressing the P button or tapping the z icon in the
setting to view options and then tap the desired option to select
it and return to live view.
If prompted to choose a value as shown
at right, edit the value by tapping u or v
and then tap the number or tap 0 to
select it and return to the previous
display.
To exit without changing settings, tap
2.
24 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Pictures
The touch screen can be used for the following playback
View other
images
Flick left or right to view other
images.
Use stretch and pinch gestures to
zoom in and out and slide to scroll
Zoom in
(photos only)
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view
full-frame playback. Use pinch and
stretch to choose the number of
images displayed from 4, 12, or 80
frames.
View
thumbnails
Tap the on-screen guide to start
movie playback (movies are
indicated by a 1 icon). Tap the
display to pause or resume, or tap
1 to exit to full-frame playback
(note that some of the icons in the
movie playback display do not
respond to touch-screen
View movies
Guide
operations).
Introduction 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Menus
The touch screen can be used for the following menu
operations.
Scroll
Slide up or down to scroll.
Choose a
menu
Tap a menu icon to choose a
menu.
Select
options/
adjust
Tap menu items to display options
and tap icons or sliders to change.
To exit without changing settings,
tap 1.
settings
26 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Steps
Follow the eight steps below to ready the camera for use.
1
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.
2
Charge the battery.
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect
the plug adapter as shown below at left, making sure the
plug is fully inserted. Insert the battery and plug the charger
in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour
and 50 minutes.
Battery charging
Charging complete
A The Battery and Charger
of this manual.
Introduction 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Insert the battery and memory card.
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that power switch is in the OFF position. Insert the
battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep
the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks
the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
Battery latch
Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.
28 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Attach a lens.
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when
the lens or body cap is removed.
Remove the camera
body cap
Remove the rear
lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting
marks
Mounting mark (lens)
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
Introduction 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
Before using the camera, unlock and extend the lens. Keeping the
retractable lens barrel button pressed (q), rotate the zoom ring as
shown (w).
Retractable lens barrel button
Pictures can not be taken when the lens is
retracted; if an error message is displayed
as a result of the camera having been
turned on with the lens retracted, rotate
the zoom ring until the message is no
longer displayed.
30 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Open the monitor.
Open the monitor as shown. Do not use force.
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection
dialog will be displayed.
A The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera on.
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera off.
Introduction 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Choose a language
and set the camera
clock.
Move cursor up
J button: select
highlighted item
Use the multi selector
and J button to
select a language and
set the camera clock.
Select highlighted
item or display sub-
menu
Move cursor down
q
w
Select language
Select time zone
e
r
Select date format
Select daylight saving time
option
t
Set time and date (note that the
camera uses a 24-hour clock)
A The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces
and reset as necessary.
32 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Focus the viewfinder.
After removing the lens
cap, rotate the diopter
adjustment control until
the AF area brackets are in
sharp focus. When
operating the control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers
or fingernails in your eye.
AF area
brackets
Viewfinder not in focus
Viewfinder in focus
information on taking photographs.
A The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed. Three days of charging will power the clock for about a
month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the
clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.
Introduction 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining
Press the R button and check the battery level and number of
exposures remaining in the information display.
Battery level
R button
Number of exposures
remaining
Battery Level
If the battery is low, a warning will also be displayed in the
viewfinder. If the information display does not appear when the
R button is pressed, the battery is exhausted and needs to be
recharged.
Information
display
L
Viewfinder
Description
Battery fully charged.
—
—
K
Battery partially discharged.
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare
battery or prepare to charge battery.
H
d
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
Battery exhausted. Charge battery.
Number of Exposures Remaining
Values over 1000 are shown in thousands, indicated by the letter
“k”.
34 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the battery-
chamber cover. Press the battery latch in the
direction shown by the arrow to release the
battery and then remove the battery by hand.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access
lamp is off, turn the camera off, open the
memory card slot cover, and press the card in
to eject it (q). The card can then be removed
by hand (w).
GB
16
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped
with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data.
When this switch is in the “lock”
position, the memory card can not
be formatted and photos can not
G B 1 6
Write-protect switch
be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if you attempt to release the
shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write”
position.
Introduction 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
36 Introduction
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w). After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and
camera body cap.
A A-M, M/A-M, A/M-M, and Vibration Reduction (VR) Switches
When using autofocus with a lens equipped
with an A-M mode switch, slide the switch to
A (if the lens has an M/A-M or A/M-M switch,
select M/A or A/M). For information on other
lenses that can be used with this camera, see
page 314.
If the lens has a vibration reduction (VR)
switch, select ON to reduce the effects of
A Retracting Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
To retract the lens when the camera is not in
use, press and hold the retractable lens
barrel button (q) and rotate the zoom ring
to the “L” (lock) position as shown (w).
Retract the lens before removing it from the
camera, and be careful not to press the
retractable lens barrel button when
attaching or removing the lens.
Introduction 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
This section describes how to shoot
photographs and movies in i and j modes,
automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which
the majority of settings are controlled by the
camera in response to shooting conditions.
Before proceeding, turn the
camera on and rotate the
mode dial to i or j (the only
difference between the two is
that the flash will not fire in j
mode).
Mode dial
Viewfinder photography
Live view
Shooting movies
Viewing movies
Deleting movies
38 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder
1
Ready the camera.
When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the
handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or
lens with your left.
When framing photographs in
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown at right.
A Using a Zoom Lens
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject
so that it fills a larger area of the frame, or
Zoom in
Zoom ring
zoom out to increase the area visible in the
final photograph (select longer focal lengths
on the lens focal length scale to zoom in,
shorter focal lengths to zoom out).
If the lens is equipped with a retractable lens
Zoom out
button while rotating the zoom ring until
the lens is released and the message shown
at right is no longer displayed, and then
adjust zoom using the zoom ring.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Frame the photograph.
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder
with the main subject in the AF area
brackets.
AF area brackets
Focus point
Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus (if
the subject is poorly lit, the
flash may pop up and the
AF-assist illuminator may
light). When the focus
operation is complete, a
beep will sound (a beep
In-focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
may not sound if the subject is moving) and the active focus
point and in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.
In-focus indicator
I
Description
Subject in focus.
Camera unable to focus using autofocus. See
I (flashes)
40 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Shoot.
Smoothly press the
shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to
take the photograph. The
memory card access lamp
will light and the
Memory card access
lamp
photograph will be
displayed in the monitor
for a few seconds. Do not
eject the memory card or
remove or disconnect the
power source until the lamp
has gone out and recording
is complete.
A The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take
the photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way
down.
Focus: press halfway
Shoot: press all the
way down
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and
readies the camera for immediate use.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Display the photograph you wish to
delete. Note that photographs can not be
recovered once deleted.
K button
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the
picture.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no
operations are performed for about eight seconds,
reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-
release button halfway to reactivate the display. The
length of time before the standby timer expires
automatically can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off
Exposure meters off
A The Built-in Flash
Exposure meters on
If additional lighting is required for correct
exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will
pop up automatically when the shutter-
the flash is raised, photographs can only be
taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is
displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not
displayed, the flash is charging; remove your
finger briefly from the shutter-release
button and try again.
When the flash is not in use, return it to its
closed position by pressing it gently
downward till the latch clicks into place.
44 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Framing Photos in the Monitor
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the camera monitor (live
view).
Live view switch
2
Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left.
When framing photographs in
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown at right.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Focus.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway. The focus
point will flash green while
the camera focuses. If the
camera is able to focus, the
focus point will be
Focus point
displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus
point will flash red.
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down. The monitor turns
off and the memory card
access lamp lights during
recording. Do not eject the
Memory card access lamp
memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source
until the lamp has gone out
and recording is complete.
When recording is
complete, the photograph
will be displayed in the
monitor for a few seconds.
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.
46 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Automatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the
camera will automatically analyze the
subject and select the appropriate
shooting mode when autofocus is
enabled. The selected mode is shown in
the monitor.
c
d
e
Portrait
Landscape
Close up
Human portrait subjects
Landscapes and cityscapes
Subjects close to the camera
Portrait subjects framed against a dark
background
f
Night portrait
Z
b
Auto
Auto (flash off)
Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not
fall into the categories listed above
A Live View
For more information on taking photographs in live view, see page
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Display the photograph you wish to
delete. Note that photographs can not be
recovered once deleted.
K button
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the
picture.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens is displayed
in the monitor.
Live view switch
2
Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left.
3
Focus.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
Focus point
50 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording. A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor.
Movie-record button
Time remaining
Recording indicator
5
End recording.
Press the movie-record button again
to end recording. Rotate the live view
switch to exit live view.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Movies
Press K to start playback and then scroll
through pictures until a movie (indicated
by a 1 icon) is displayed. Press J to start
playback and press 1 or K to end
playback. For more information, see page
181.
K button
A Recording Movies
52 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Unwanted Movies
Display the movie you wish to delete
(movies are indicated by 1 icons). Note
that movies can not be recovered once
deleted.
K button
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the
movie.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Settings to the Subject or
Situation (Scene Mode)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a
mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 38.
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to h and rotating the command dial until the desired scene
appears in the monitor.
+
Mode dial
Command dial
Monitor
k Portrait
t Beach/Snow
l Landscape
p Child
u Sunset
v Dusk/Dawn
w Pet Portrait
m Sports
n Close up
x
Candlelight
o Night Portrait
r Night Landscape
s Party/Indoor
y Blossom
z Autumn Colors
0
Food
54 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
kPortrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-
looking skin tones. If the subject is
far from the background or a
telephoto lens is used, background
details will be softened to lend the
composition a sense of depth.
lLandscape
Use for vivid landscape shots in
daylight.
A Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
pChild
Use for snapshots of children.
Clothing and background details
are vividly rendered, while skin
tones remain soft and natural.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
mSports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion
for dynamic sports shots in which
the main subject stands out clearly.
A Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
nClose up
Use for close-up shots of flowers,
insects, and other small objects (a
macro lens can be used to focus at
very close ranges).
oNight Portrait
Use for a natural balance between
the main subject and the
background in portraits taken
under low light.
56 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rNight Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors
when photographing night
landscapes, including street
lighting and neon signs.
A Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
sParty/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor
background lighting. Use for
parties and other indoor scenes.
tBeach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlit
expanses of water, snow, or sand.
A Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
uSunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in
sunsets and sunrises.
A Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
vDusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the
weak natural light before dawn or
after sunset.
A Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
wPet Portrait
Use for portraits of active pets.
A Note
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
58 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xCandlelight
For photographs taken by
candlelight.
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
yBlossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
bloom, and other landscapes
featuring expanses of blossoms.
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
zAutumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and
yellows in autumn leaves.
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Effects
Special effects can be used when taking photographs and
shooting movies.
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to q and rotating the command dial until the desired option
appears in the monitor.
+
Mode dial
Command dial
Monitor
% Night Vision
S Super Vivid
T Pop
( Miniature Effect
3 Selective Color
1 Silhouette
2 High Key
U Photo Illustration
' Toy Camera Effect
3 Low Key
%Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to
record monochrome images at high
ISO sensitivities.
A Note
Pictures may be affected by noise in the form of randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines. Autofocus is available in live view only; manual focus
can be used if the camera is unable to focus. The built-in flash and AF-
assist illuminator turn off.
Special Effects 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSuper Vivid
Overall saturation and contrast are
increased for a more vibrant image.
T Pop
Overall saturation is increased for a
more lively image.
UPhoto Illustration
Sharpen outlines and simplify
coloring for a poster effect that can
A Note
Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series
of stills.
62 Special Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
'Toy Camera Effect
Create photos and movies that
appear to have been shot with a toy
camera. The effect can be adjusted
(Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be
pictures of dioramas. Works best
when shooting from a high vantage
point. Miniature effect movies play
back at high speed, compressing
about 45 minutes of footage shot at
1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that
plays back in about three minutes.
The effect can be adjusted in live
A Note
Sound is not recorded with movies. The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off.
3Selective Color
All colors other than the selected
colors are recorded in black and
white. The effect can be adjusted in
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Special Effects 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Silhouette
Silhouette subjects against bright
backgrounds.
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
2High Key
Use with bright scenes to create
bright images that seem filled with
light.
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
3Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark,
low-key images with prominent
highlights.
A Note
The built-in flash turns off.
64 Special Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, S, T, U, ', (, and 3modes.
Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG option is
selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images. JPEG images
created at settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG will be recorded at the selected
JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be
recorded as fine-quality images.
A U and ( Modes
Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view
refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous
release modes; using autofocus during live view photography will
disrupt the preview.
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
Special Effects 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options Available in Live View
Settings for the selected effect are adjusted in the live view
display but apply during live view and viewfinder photography
and movie recording.
❚❚ UPhoto Illustration
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
Live view switch
2
3
Adjust outline thickness.
Press J to display the options shown
at right. Press 4 or 2 to make
outlines thicker or thinner.
Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
66 Special Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ 'Toy Camera Effect
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
Live view switch
2
Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown
at right. Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Vignetting and press 4
or 2 to change. Adjust vividness to
make colors more or less saturated,
vignetting to control the amount of vignetting.
3
Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
Special Effects 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ (Miniature Effect
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
Live view switch
2
Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the
focus point in the area that will be in
focus and then press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus. To
temporarily clear miniature effect
options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor
for precise focus, press X. Press W (Q) to restore the
miniature effect display.
3
4
Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect
options.
Adjust options.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be in
focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its
width.
68 Special Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
❚❚ 3 Selective Color
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
Live view switch
2
3
Display options.
Press J to display selective color
options.
Selected color
Select a color.
Frame an object in the white square in
the center of the display and press 1
to choose the color of the object as
one that will remain in the final image
(the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color). To zoom in on the center of the display for
more precise color selection, press X. Press W (Q) to zoom
out.
Special Effects 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color range
4
5
Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final image. Choose
from values between 1 and 7; note
that higher values may include hues
from other colors.
Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the command dial to
highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top
of the display and repeat
Steps 3 and 4 to select another color. Repeat for a third color
if desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press O (To
remove all colors, press and hold O. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; select Yes).
6
Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete. During shooting,
only objects of the selected hues will be recorded in color; all
others will be recorded in black-and-white. To resume
viewfinder photography, rotate the live view switch. The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs and movies recorded in live view or using the
viewfinder.
70 Special Effects
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
More on Photography
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose how the shutter is released
(release mode), press the I (E/#)
button, then highlight the desired option
and press J.
A Choosing a Release Mode with the Command
Dial
I (E/#) button
The release mode can also be selected by
keeping the I (E/#) button pressed while
rotating the command dial. Release the
I (E/#) button to select the highlighted
option and return to the information
display.
Mode
Description
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-
release button is pressed.
8
Continuous L: The camera takes photographs at a slow rate while
Continuous H: The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while
Quiet shutter release: As for single-frame, except that camera noise
Delayed remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release
Quick-response remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released when shutter-
release button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed
!
9
J
E
"
#
More on Photography 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
In ! (Continuous L) and 9 (Continuous H) modes, the
camera takes photographs continuously while the shutter-
release button is pressed all the way down.
1
Press the I (E/#) button.
I (E/#) button
2
Choose a continuous release mode.
Highlight ! (Continuous L) or
9 (Continuous H) and press J.
3
4
Focus.
Frame the shot and focus.
Take photographs.
The camera will take photographs
while the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
72 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession
(an exception is if a shutter speed of 4 seconds or slower is selected in
mode S or M, when there is no limit on the number of shots that can be
taken in a single burst). Depending on the battery level and the
number of images in the buffer, recording may take from a few
seconds to a few minutes. If the battery is exhausted while images
remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the
images transferred to the memory card.
A Frame Rate
For information on the number of photographs can be taken in
the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.
A The Built-in Flash
Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash;
A Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that
can be stored in the memory buffer at
current settings is shown in the viewfinder exposure-count display
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
More on Photography 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quiet Shutter Release
Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum. A beep
does not sound when the camera focuses.
1
Press the I (E/#) button.
I (E/#) button
2
3
Select J (Quiet shutter release).
Highlight J (Quiet shutter release)
and press J.
Take pictures.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down to shoot.
74 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that
include the photographer. Before proceeding, mount the
camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.
1
Press the I (E/#) button.
I (E/#) button
2
3
Select E (Self-timer) mode.
Highlight E (Self-timer) and press J.
Frame the photograph.
More on Photography 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus, and then press the
button the rest of the way down. The
self-timer lamp will start to flash and a
beep will begin to sound. Two
seconds before the photo is taken, the
lamp will stop flashing and the
beeping will become more rapid. The
shutter will be released ten seconds
after the timer starts.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released. To stop the timer
without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
to the viewfinder. To attach the cap, remove the rubber eyecup (q)
and insert the cap as shown (w).
Rubber eyecup
Eyepiece cap
76 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the
flash to be raised manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has
started.
A Custom Setting c3 (Self-Timer)
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the
More on Photography 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus (Viewfinder Photography)
This section describes the focus options available when
photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus can be
adjusted automatically or manually (see “Choosing How the
Camera Focuses: Focus Mode,” below). The user can also select
focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode
Choose from the following focus modes. Note that AF-S and AF-C
are available only in modes P, S, A, and M.
Option
Description
Camera automatically selects single-servo
autofocus if subject is stationary, continuous-
servo autofocus if subject is moving. Shutter
can only be released if camera is able to focus.
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Shutter can only be released if camera is able
to focus.
AF-A Auto-servo AF
AF-S Single-servo AF
For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter
can only be released if camera is able to focus,
but Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
shutter to be released at any time.
Continuous-
AF-C
servo AF
MF Manual focus
78 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Display focus mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
P button
Information display
Choose a focus mode.
Highlight a focus mode and press J.
A Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A
mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject
moves toward the camera while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
D Continuous-Servo Autofocus
When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera gives higher priority to
focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the
shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
More on Photography 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually
distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a
skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that
are small or lack variation in brightness.
80 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist
illuminator will light automatically to assist
the autofocus operation when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway (some
illuminator may become hot when used
multiple times in quick succession and will
turn off automatically to protect the lamp
after a period of continuous use. Normal
function will resume after a brief pause.
AF-assist illuminator
More on Photography 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected. Note that
d (dynamic-area) and f (3D-tracking) AF-area modes are not
available when AF-S is selected for focus mode.
Option
Description
For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected
c
Single-point AF manually; camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point only.
For non-stationary subjects. In AF-A and AF-C
focus modes, user selects focus point using multi
on information from surrounding focus points
if subject briefly leaves selected point.
Number of focus points varies with mode
selected:
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is
time to compose photograph or when
photographing subjects that are moving
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a
track).
Dynamic-area AF
(9 points)
J
Dynamic-area AF
(21 points)
K
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football
game).
Dynamic-area AF
(39 points)
L
39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
quickly and are hard to keep in frame (e.g.,
birds).
82 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
Quickly compose pictures with subjects that
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g.,
tennis players). In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user
selects focus point using multi selector
focused, camera uses 3D-tracking to select
new focus point and keep focus locked on
original subject while shutter-release button
is pressed halfway.
f
e
3D-tracking
Camera automatically detects subject and
selects focus point.
Auto-area AF
1
Display AF-area mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
2
Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
More on Photography 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or
M are reset when another shooting mode is selected.
A 3D-Tracking
If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-
release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point. Note that when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are
stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the
background.
84 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus Point Selection
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-
area modes other than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from
39 focus points, making it possible to compose photographs
with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.
1
Choose an AF-area mode other than
2
Return to the shooting display.
Press P to return to the shooting
display.
P button
3
Select the focus point.
Focus point
Use the multi selector to select the
focus point in the viewfinder or
information display while the
standby timer is on. Press J to select
the center focus point.
More on Photography 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing
focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final
composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus
photograph after focusing on another object at the same
distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most effective
when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-
1
Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to initiate
focus. Check that the in-
focus indicator (I) appears
in the viewfinder.
86 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (q), press the A (L) button
(w) to lock focus. Focus will remain
locked while the A (L) button is
pressed, even if you later remove your
finger from the shutter-release
button.
Shutter-release button
A (L) button
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus
indicator (I) appears, and remain locked until you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also
be locked by pressing the A (L) button (see above).
3
Recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep
the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (AF-S) or
keep the A (L) button
pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be
taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves,
focus again at the new distance.
A Autoexposure Lock
More on Photography 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or
1
Set the lens focus-mode switch.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M mode
switch, slide the switch to M.
A-M mode switch
M/A-M mode switch
2
Focus.
To focus manually, adjust the lens
focus ring until the image displayed
on the clear matte field in the
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs
can be taken at any time, even when
the image is not in focus.
88 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of
f/5.6 or faster, the viewfinder focus
indicator can be used to confirm whether
the subject in the selected focus point is
in focus (the focus point can be selected
from any of the 39 focus points). After
positioning the subject in the selected
focus point, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate
the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in
focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
A Selecting Manual Focus with the Camera
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with
manual override) or A/M (autofocus with
manual override/AF priority), manual focus
can also be selected by setting the camera
Focus can then be adjusted manually,
regardless of the mode selected with the
lens.
A Focal Plane Position
The position of the focal plane is
indicated by the focal plane mark on the
camera body. The distance between the
lens mounting flange and the focal plane
is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5mm
Focal plane mark
More on Photography 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space
each photograph occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher
quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require
more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Option
File type
Description
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) + NEF/ Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
JPEG normal JPEG and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
Raw data from the image sensor are saved
without additional processing. Settings such as
white balance and contrast can be adjusted after
shooting.
NEF (RAW)
JPEG fine
NEF
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG normal JPEG
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
JPEG basic
A NEF (RAW) + JPEG
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the
camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs
taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be
deleted.
90 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Display image quality options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image quality in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
Choose a file type.
Highlight an option and press J.
A NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of
image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
More on Photography 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Size
Choose a size for JPEG images:
Image size
Large
Medium
Small
Size (pixels)
Print size (cm/in.) *
50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3
38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10
25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7
#
$
%
6000 × 4000
4496 × 3000
2992 × 2000
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
1
Display image size options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image size in the information
display and press J.
P button
Information display
2
Choose an image size.
Highlight an option and press J.
92 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Built-in Flash
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing
poorly lit or backlit subjects.
Auto Pop-up Modes
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, and ' modes, the built-in flash
automatically pops up and fires as required.
1
Choose a flash mode.
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial
until the desired flash mode appears in the information
display.
+
M (Y) button
Command dial
Information display
2
Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as
required when the shutter-
release button is pressed
halfway, and fire when a
photograph is taken. If the
flash does not pop up
automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand. Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the flash.
More on Photography 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
• No (auto): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit,
the flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway and fires as required. Not available
in o mode.
• Njo (auto + red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The
flash pops up and fires as required, but before it fires the red-
eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not
available in o mode.
• Njr (auto slow sync + red-eye reduction): As for auto
with red-eye reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are
used to capture background lighting. Use for portraits taken
at night or under low light. Available in o mode.
• Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to
capture background lighting in shots taken at night or under
low light. Available in o mode.
• j (flash off): The flash does not fire.
A The Information Display
Flash mode can also be selected in the
94 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Pop-up Modes
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The
flash will not fire if it is not raised.
1
Raise the flash.
Press the M (Y) button to raise the
flash.
M (Y) button
2
Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial
until the desired flash mode appears in the information
display.
+
M (Y) button
Command dial
Information display
3
Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
More on Photography 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
• N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.
• Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with
every shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp
lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not available in 0 mode.
• Njp (slow sync + red-eye): As for “red-eye reduction”,
above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use
when you want to include background lighting in portraits.
Not available in modes S, M, and 0.
• Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash”, above, except that
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background
lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to
capture both subject and background. Not available in
modes S, M, and 0.
• Nt (rear-curtain + slow sync): As for “rear-curtain sync”,
below, except that shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use
when you want to capture both subject and background. Not
available in modes S, M, and 0.
• Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the
shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind moving light
sources as shown below at right. Not available in modes P, A,
and 0.
Front-curtain sync
Rear-curtain sync
96 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
A The Built-in Flash
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash,
minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range
of zoom lenses with a macro function.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it
has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used
again after a short pause.
More on Photography 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in
flash is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
1/200–1/60 s
i, p, n, s, w, 0, S, T, U, '
k
1/200–1/30 s
o
1/200–1 s
1/200–30 s
1/200–30 s, Bulb, Time
P, S, A
M
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
Approximate range
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
m
ft
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
32
—
5.6
8
8
11
16
22
11
16
22
16
22
32
—
—
—
—
—
1.0–8.5 3ft 4in.–27ft 10in.
0.7–6.0 2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.
11
16
22
32
—
—
0.6–4.2
0.6–3.0
0.6–2.1
0.6–1.5
0.6–1.1
0.6–0.7
2ft–13ft 9in.
2ft–9ft 10in.
2ft–6ft 10in.
2ft–4ft 11in.
2ft–3ft 7in.
2ft–2ft 4in.
32
32
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
98 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISO Sensitivity
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the
amount of light available. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less
light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter
speeds or smaller apertures. Choosing Auto allows the camera
to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting
conditions; to use auto in P, S, A, and M modes, select Auto ISO
sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings item in the
Mode
i, j, %
P, S, A, M
ISO sensitivity
Auto
100–25600 in steps of 1/3 EV
Auto; 100–25600 in steps of 1/3 EV
Other shooting modes
1
Display ISO sensitivity options.
Press the P button, then highlight
the current ISO sensitivity in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
More on Photography 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
D Before Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results in the monitor. To ensure that
shooting starts at the desired time, check that the camera clock is set
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure
the battery is fully charged.
1
Select Interval timer shooting.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in
the shooting menu and press 2 to
display interval timer settings.
More on Photography 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Adjust interval timer settings.
Choose a start option, interval, number of shots per interval,
and exposure smoothing option.
• To choose a start option:
Highlight Start options and
Highlight an option and
press 2.
press J.
To start shooting immediately, select Now. To start
shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose start
day and start time, then choose the date and time and
press J.
• To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight Interval and
Choose an interval (hours,
minutes, and seconds) and
press J.
press 2.
102 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To choose the number of intervals:
Highlight Number of times
Choose the number of intervals
and press 2.
and press J.
• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Highlight Exposure
smoothing and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on).
More on Photography 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J. The first
series of shots will be taken at the
specified starting time, or after about
3 s if Now was selected for Start
options in Step 2. Shooting will
continue at the selected interval until all shots have been
taken; while shooting is in progress, the memory card access
lamp will flash at regular intervals. Note that because shutter
speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot, intervals may be
skipped if the camera is still in the process of recording the
previous interval; choose an interval longer than the slowest
anticipated shutter speed. If shooting can not proceed at
current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of “Bulb” or
“Time” is currently selected in shooting mode M, the interval
is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning
will be displayed in the monitor.
104 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J. To resume shooting:
Starting Now
Highlight Restart and
press J.
Starting at a Specified Time
For Start options,
highlightChoosestart and time and press J.
day and start time
Choose a starting date Highlight Restart and
press J.
and press 2.
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting
To end interval timer photography and resume normal shooting
before all the photos are taken, pause shooting and select Off in
the interval timer menu.
More on Photography 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is
selected in AF-A (note that the camera focuses again before each
shot). Shooting will resume with the next interval.
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
A Other Settings
Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography.
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera takes one
photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise will be reduced.
used.
A Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the
mode dial to a new setting. Returning the monitor to the storage
position does not interrupt interval timer shooting.
106 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Photography
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control
reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. Before proceeding,
mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
1
Press the I (E/#) button.
I (E/#) button
2
3
Select a remote control mode.
Highlight " (Delayed remote
(ML-L3)) or # (Quick-response
remote (ML-L3)) and press J.
Frame the photograph.
Check focus by pressing the shutter-
release button halfway.
More on Photography 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Take the photograph.
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less,
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at
either of the infrared receivers on the
shutter-release button. In delayed
remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
light for about two seconds before the shutter is released. In
quick-response remote mode, the self-timer lamp will flash
after the shutter has been released.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released.
A Before Using the ML-L3 Remote Control
Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic
battery-insulator sheet.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
A The Camera Shutter-Release Button/Other Remote Control Devices
If an ML-L3 remote release mode is selected and the shutter is released
by any means other than an ML-L3 remote control (for example, the
camera shutter-release button or the shutter button on an optional
remote cord or wireless remote controller), the camera will function in
single-frame release mode.
108 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Exiting Remote Control Mode
Remote control mode is cancelled automatically if no photograph is
taken before the time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on
cancelled if the camera is turned off, a two-button reset is performed
A Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes
interrupted if the flash is raised after the shutter-release button on the
ML-L3 is pressed. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond
to the ML-L3 shutter-release button once the flash has charged. In
auto pop-up modes, the flash will begin charging when a remote
control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically
pop up and fire when required.
A Wireless Remote Controllers
Remote control is also available with various combinations of WR-R10,
shutter-release buttons on the wireless remote controllers perform the
same functions as the camera shutter-release button. For more
information, see the manual provided with the remote controllers.
More on Photography 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restoring Default Settings
The camera settings listed below
to default values by holding the
G and R buttons down
together for more than two
seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot). The
G button
R button
information display turns off briefly while settings are reset.
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Information Display
Option
Default
JPEG normal
Large
0
Image quality
Image size
Auto bracketing
P, S, A, M
HDR (high dynamic range)
P, S, A, M
Active D-Lighting
P, S, A, M
White balance
P, S, A, M
Off
Off
135
Auto
Auto 1
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M
Other shooting modes
Picture Control settings
P, S, A, M
100
Auto
Unmodified 2
1
Fine-tuning is also reset.
2
Current Picture Control only.
110 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Default
0
Focus mode
Viewfinder
Shooting modes other than %
Live view/movie
AF-A
AF-S
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3
Single-point AF
m, w
Dynamic-area AF (39 points)
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z, S,
T, U, ', 3, P, S, A, M
Auto-area AF
Live view/movie
k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, z
m, r, w, %, S, T, U, ', 3, 1, 2, 3, P, S,
A, M
Face-priority AF
Wide-area AF
n, 0
Metering
P, S, A, M
Normal-area AF
Matrix metering
Flash mode
i, k, p, n, w, S, T, '
o
Auto
Auto slow sync
Auto+red-eye reduction
Flash off
94,
s
U
P, S, A, M
Fill flash
Flash compensation
h, P, S, A, M
Exposure compensation
h, %, P, S, A, M
Off
Off
More on Photography 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Other Settings
Option
Default
14-bit
Off
0
NEF (RAW) recording
Exposure delay mode
Release mode
m, w
Other shooting modes
Focus point
Continuous H
Single frame
Center
AE/AF lock hold
Shooting modes other than i and j
Flexible program
P
Off
Off
Special effects mode
U
Thickness
'
Vividness
Vignetting
(
0
0
Orientation
Width
Landscape
Normal
3
Color
Color range
Off
3
112 More on Photography
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P, S, A, and M Modes
Shutter Speed and Aperture
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of
control over shutter speed and aperture:
Mode
Description
Recommended for snapshots and in other
situations in which there is little time to
adjust camera settings. Camera sets
shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure.
Programmed auto
P
Use to freeze or blur motion. User chooses
shutter speed; camera selects aperture for
best results.
Shutter-priority auto
S
A
Use to blur background or bring both
Aperture-priority auto foreground and background into focus.
User chooses aperture; camera selects
shutter speed for best results.
User controls both shutter speed and
aperture. Set shutter speed to “Bulb” or
“Time” for long time-exposures.
M
P, S, A, and M Modes 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Shutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and
information display.
Shutter speed
Aperture
Fast shutter speeds (1/1600 s in this Slow shutter speeds (here 1 s) blur
example) freeze motion.
motion.
Large apertures (such as f/5.6;
remember, the lower the f-number,
the larger the aperture) blur details
in front of and behind the main
subject.
Small apertures (f/22 in this case)
bring both background and
foreground into focus.
114 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
This mode is recommended
for snapshots or whenever
you want to leave the camera
in charge of shutter speed and
aperture. The camera
Mode dial
automatically adjusts shutter
speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most
situations.
To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the mode
dial to P.
P, S, A, and M Modes 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can
be selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate
the dial right for large apertures (low f-numbers) and fast shutter
speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter
speeds. All combinations produce the same exposure.
Rotate right to blur background details or
freeze motion.
Command dial
Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur
motion.
While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)
indicator appears in the viewfinder and
information display. To restore default
shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate
the command dial until the indicator is no
longer displayed, choose another mode, or
turn the camera off.
116 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter
speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest
motion by blurring moving objects. The camera automatically
adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.
Fast shutter speeds (e.g., 1/1600 s)
freeze motion.
Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur
motion.
To choose a shutter speed:
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
Mode dial
2
Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial to choose the desired shutter
speed: rotate right for faster speeds, left for slower speeds.
Command dial
P, S, A, and M Modes 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field
(the distance in front of and behind the main subject that
appears to be in focus). The camera automatically adjusts
shutter speed for optimal exposure.
Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g. Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g.
f/5.6) blur details in front of and
behind the main subject.
f/22) bring the foreground and
background into focus.
To choose an aperture:
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
Mode dial
2
Choose an aperture.
Rotate the command dial left for larger apertures (lower f-
numbers), right for smaller apertures (higher f-numbers).
Command dial
118 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode M (Manual)
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.
Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are available for long time-
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
Mode dial
P, S, A, and M Modes 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter
speed and aperture. Shutter speed is selected by rotating the
command dial (right for faster speeds, left for slower). To
adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button pressed while
rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower
f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).
Shutter speed
Command dial
Aperture
E (N) button
Command dial
A The Exposure Indicator
or “Time” is selected, the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and
information display shows whether the photograph would be under-
or over-exposed at current settings.
Optimal exposure
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV
120 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter
speeds for long time-exposures
of moving lights, the stars, night
scenery, or fireworks.
•
Bulb (A): The shutter
remains open while the
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down. To
prevent blur, use a tripod or an
Time (&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button
on the camera or on an optional remote control, remote cord,
or wireless remote controller. The shutter remains open until
the button is pressed a second time.
•
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on
a stable, level surface. To prevent light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with
exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with
your hand or other objects such as an optional eyepiece cap
is complete, use a fully charged battery. Note that noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in
long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by
choosing On for Long exposure NR in the shooting menu
P, S, A, and M Modes 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Bulb
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
Mode dial
2
Choose the shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial to choose a
shutter speed of Bulb (A).
Command dial
3
Take the photograph.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera, optional wireless remote controller or remote cord
all the way down. Take your finger from the shutter-release
button when the exposure is complete.
122 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Time
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
Mode dial
2
Choose the shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial left to
choose a shutter speed of “Time” (&).
Command dial
3
4
Open the shutter.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless
remote controller all the way down.
Close the shutter.
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3.
P, S, A, and M Modes 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A ML-L3 Remote Controls
If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select one of the
following remote control modes as described on page 107:
" (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or # (Quick-response remote
(ML-L3)). Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures
will be taken in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A is selected for
shutter speed. The exposure starts when the shutter-release button on
the remote control is pressed and ends after 30 minutes or when the
button is pressed again.
124 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure.
Method
Description
Produces natural results in most situations. The
camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets
exposure according to tone distribution, color,
composition, and distance.
L
M
N
Matrix metering
Classic meter for portraits. Camera meters entire
Center-weighted frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.
metering
Recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be
correctly exposed, even when background is
much brighter or darker. Camera meters current
focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.
Spot metering
1
Display metering options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current metering method in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
P, S, A, and M Modes 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Choose a metering method.
Highlight an option and press J.
A Spot Metering
If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder
126 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
M (Center-weighted metering) and N (Spot metering) to
meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is not available in
i or j mode.
1
Meter exposure.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
2
Lock exposure.
Shutter-release
button
With the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (q) and the subject
positioned in the focus point, press
the A (L) button (w) to lock
exposure.
A (L) button
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
3
Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the A (L) button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
P, S, A, and M Modes 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Mode
Setting
Shutter speed and aperture
Shutter speed
Programmed auto
Shutter-priority auto
Aperture-priority auto
Aperture
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is
in effect.
128 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker
while negative values make it darker. It is most effective when
used with M (Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot
–1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
To choose a value for exposure compensation, keep the E (N)
button pressed and rotate the command dial until the desired
value is selected in the viewfinder or information display.
+
E (N) button
Command dial
Information display
+2 EV
–0.3 EV
P, S, A, and M Modes 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to 0. Except in h and % modes, exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
h and % modes, exposure compensation will be reset when
another mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
A The Information Display
Exposure compensation options can also be
accessed from the information display
A Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator.
A Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background
exposure and flash level.
A Bracketing
For information on automatically varying exposure over a series of
shots, see page 148.
130 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level
suggested by the camera, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background. Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons pressed and rotate the
command dial until the desired value is selected in the
viewfinder or information display. In general, positive values
make the main subject seem brighter while negative values
make it seem darker. Normal flash output can be restored by
setting flash compensation to 0. Except in h mode, flash
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
h mode, flash compensation will be reset when another
mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
M (Y) button
+
Command dial
Information display
E (N) button
–0.3 EV
+1 EV
P, S, A, and M Modes 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Information Display
Flash compensation options can also be
accessed from the information display
A Optional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that
flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to
the flash compensation selected with the camera.
132 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is not
recommended in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective
Active D-Lighting: ! Off
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
1
Display Active D-Lighting options.
Press the P button, then highlight
Active D-Lighting in the information
display and press J.
P button
Information display
P, S, A, and M Modes 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in
photographs taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be
visible with some subjects.
A “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the
dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu
A Bracketing
For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots, see page 148.
134 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a
single image that captures a wide range of tones from shadows
to highlights, even with high-contrast subjects. HDR is most
not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. While HDR is in effect,
the flash can not be used and continuous shooting is not
available.
+
First exposure (darker)
Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
1
Display HDR (high dynamic range)
options.
Press the P button, then highlight
HDR (high dynamic range) in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
P, S, A, and M Modes 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Choose an option.
Highlight v Auto, 2 Extra high,
S High, T Normal, U Low, or
6 Off and press J.
When an option other than 6 Off is
selected, u will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures
when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down. “l u”
will flash in the viewfinder while the images are combined; no
photographs can be taken until recording is complete. HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken; to turn
off HDR before shooting, rotate the mode dial to a setting
other than P, S, A, or M.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use
of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, the effect may
not be visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos
may appear around dark objects. Uneven shading may be visible with
some subjects.
136 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended for most
light sources; other values can be selected if necessary
according to the type of source:
Option
Auto
Description
Automatic white balance adjustment.
Recommended in most situations.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with the light sources listed on page 138.
v
J
I
H
N
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
Flash
Use with the flash.
G
M
Cloudy
Shade
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
Measure white balance or copy white balance
L
Preset manual
1
Display white balance options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current white balance setting in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
P, S, A, and M Modes 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Choose a white balance option.
Highlight an option and press J.
A The Shooting Menu
White balance can be selected using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
The I Fluorescent option in the White
balance menu can be used to select the
light source from the bulb types shown at
right.
A Touch Menu Navigation
Tap an option in the white balance menu once to highlight it and again
to select it and either display a menu of bulb types (I Fluorescent) or
return to the shooting menu.
138 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors
“Cooler” (bluer) colors
3000
4000
5000
6000
8000
10000
[
]
K
q
w
e
r
tyu
i
o
!
!
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
!
!
J (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K
I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
N (flash): 5400 K
G (cloudy): 6000 K
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
M (shade): 8000 K
Note: All figures are approximate.
A Bracketing
For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a
series of shots, see page 148.
P, S, A, and M Modes 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations
in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color
cast into an image. White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu.
1
Display fine-tuning options.
Highlight a white balance option and
press 2 (if Fluorescent is selected,
highlight the desired lighting type
and press 2; note that fine-tuning is
not available with Preset manual).
2
Fine-tune white balance.
Coordinates
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance. White balance can be
fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B)
axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25. The
horizontal (amber-blue) axis
Adjustment
corresponds to color temperature,
while the vertical (green-magenta)
axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color
compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal axis is ruled in
increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in
increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J.
140 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (incandescent) is selected will make photographs slightly “colder”
but will not actually make them blue.
A Touch Fine-Tuning
To fine-tune an option in the white balance menu using the touch
screen, tap the option once to highlight it and then tap the 2 Adjust
button to view the fine-tuning display. To choose a value, tap the
coordinate display or the u, v, x, or y icons. Tap 0 OK to return to the
shooting menu once white balance has been adjusted to your
satisfaction.
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
6
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 , is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
P, S, A, and M Modes 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available
for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that
will be used in final photo and white balance measured by
camera (see below).
Measure
White balance is copied from photo on memory card
Use photo
❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1
2
Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that
will be used in the final photograph.
Display white balance options.
Highlight White balance in the
shooting menu and press 2to display
white balance options. Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
3
Select Measure.
Highlight Measure and press 2.
142 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Select Yes.
The menu shown at right will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
The camera will enter preset
measurement mode.
When the camera is ready to measure
white balance, a flashing D(L) will
appear in the viewfinder and
information display.
5
Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing,
frame the reference object so that it
fills the viewfinder and press the
shutter-release button all the way down. No photograph will
be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even
when the camera is not in focus.
P, S, A, and M Modes 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, the message
shown at right will be displayed and
a will flash in the viewfinder and the
camera will return to shooting mode.
To return to shooting mode
immediately, press the shutter-release
button halfway.
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance. A message will appear
in the information display and a
flashing b a will appear in the
viewfinder. Return to Step 5 and
measure white balance again.
144 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Measuring Preset White Balance
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting
D Preset White Balance
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time;
the existing value will be replaced when a new value is measured.
Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that the
A Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset
white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by keeping
the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white
balance with the Fn button and command dial.
A Gray Panels
For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray
panel.
P, S, A, and M Modes 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a
photograph on the memory card.
1
2
3
4
Select Preset manual.
Highlight White balance in the
shooting menu and press 2to display
white balance options. Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
Select Use photo.
Highlight Use photo and press 2.
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2
(to skip the remaining steps and use
the image last selected for preset
white balance, select This image).
Choose a folder.
Highlight the folder containing the
source image and press 2.
146 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Highlight the source image.
To view the highlighted image full
frame, press and hold the X button.
Copy white balance.
Press J to set preset white balance to the white balance
value for the highlighted photograph.
P, S, A, and M Modes 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or
Active D-Lighting (ADL) settings slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
Option
Description
Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.
k
AE bracketing
Shot 1:
unmodified
Shot 2: exposure Shot 3: exposure
reduced increased
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates
m
!
WB bracketing three images, each with a different white balance.
Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).
Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and
another at the current Active D-Lighting setting.
ADL bracketing
1
Choose a bracketing option.
Highlight e2 (Auto bracketing set) in
the Custom Settings menu and press
2.
Highlight the desired bracketing type
and press J.
148 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Display bracketing options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current bracketing setting and press
J.
P button
Information display
Select a bracketing increment.
Highlight a bracketing increment and
press J. Choose from values between
0.3 and 2 EV (AE bracketing) or 1 to 3
(WB bracketing), or select ADL (ADL
bracketing).
P, S, A, and M Modes 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
AE bracketing: The camera will vary
exposure with each shot. The first
shot will be taken at the value currently selected for exposure
compensation. The bracketing increment will be subtracted
from the current value in the second shot and added in the
third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified
values are reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and
aperture.
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies,
one at the current white balance setting, one with increased
amber, and one with increased blue.
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is
taken with Active D-Lighting off, the second at the current
the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set to
Auto).
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release
modes, shooting will pause after each bracketing cycle. If the
camera is turned off before all shots in the bracketing sequence
have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in
the sequence when the camera is turned on.
150 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Bracketing Progress Indicator
During AE bracketing, a bar is removed
from the bracketing progress indicator
with each shot (v > w > x).
During ADL bracketing, the setting that
will be used for the next shot is underlined
in the information display.
A Disabling Bracketing
To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in Step
recorded, rotate the mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If auto
ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the camera will automatically vary
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded.
P, S, A, and M Modes 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Picture Controls
In P, S, A, and M modes, your choice of Picture Control determines
how pictures are processed (in other modes, the camera selects
a Picture Control automatically).
Selecting a Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Option
Description
Recommended for most situations, this option uses
standard processing for balanced results.
A good choice for photographs that will later be
processed or retouched, this option uses minimal
processing for natural results.
Q Standard
R Neutral
Choose this option for photographs that emphasize
primary colors. Pictures are enhanced for a vivid,
photoprint effect.
S
Vivid
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
e Portrait
f Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
Choose for photographs that will later be
extensively processed or retouched. Details are
preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights
to shadows.
q
Flat
152 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
Display Picture Control options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current Picture Control and press J.
P button
Information display
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a Picture Control and press
J.
A Touch Menu Navigation
When choosing an option from the Set Picture Control menu using
to select it.
P, S, A, and M Modes 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Picture Controls
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
and press 2.
2
3
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
command dial to choose a value in
this step until all settings have been adjusted, or select a
preset combination of settings by using the multi selector to
choose Quick adjust. Default settings can be restored by
pressing the O button.
Save changes and exit.
Press J.
Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).
154 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Description
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected
Picture Control (note that this resets all manual
adjustments). Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, Flat, or custom Picture Controls
Quick adjust
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to
adjust sharpening automatically according to
the type of scene.
Sharpening
Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the
camera adjust clarity automatically.
Depending on the scene, shadows may appear
around bright objects or halos may appear
around dark objects at some settings. Clarity is
not applied to movies.
Clarity
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the
camera adjust contrast automatically.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail
in highlights or shadows.
Contrast
Brightness
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to
adjust saturation automatically according to
the type of scene.
Saturation
Hue
Adjust hue.
Simulate the effect of color filters on
Filter effects
Toning
Choose the tint used in monochrome
P, S, A, and M Modes 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
A Switching Between Manual and Auto
Press the X button to switch back and forth
between manual and auto (A) settings for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation.
A Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
among other cameras of the same model and compatible software
A Previous Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting. Use this as
a reference when adjusting settings.
A Custom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
A Using the Touch Screen
To use the touch screen to modify a Picture
Control in the Set Picture Control menu,
tap the Picture Control once to highlight it
and then tap the 2 Adjust button to view
a parameter once to highlight it and again to
display options, then use the on-screen
controls to choose a value (the multi selector can not be used). Note
that the touch screen can only be used for this purpose if Enable is
selected for Touch controls.
156 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
Option
Description
Y
O
Yellow
Orange
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red
more contrast than orange.
R
G
Red
Green
Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more
pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation in increments of 1, or rotate the
command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25. Saturation control is not
available when B&W (black-and-white) is
selected.
A Touch-Screen Character Entry
To type, tap the letters in the keyboard area (you can select letters by
sliding a finger over the screen: the letters are highlighted as you touch
them and are not entered in the text area until you lift your finger). To
position the cursor, tap directly in the text area or tap the x or y
buttons.
P, S, A, and M Modes 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1
2
3
Select Manage Picture Control.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in
the shooting menu and press 2.
Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed to
Step 5 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
4
Edit the selected Picture Control.
To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the O
button. Press J when settings are
complete.
158 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Select a destination.
Highlight a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
Name the Picture Control.
Name area
By default, new Picture Controls are
named by adding a two-digit number
(assigned automatically) to the name
of the existing Picture Control; to use
the default name, proceed to Step 7.
To move the cursor in the name area,
rotate the command dial. To enter a
new letter at the current cursor
Keyboard area
position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired
character in the keyboard area and press J. To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
7
Press X.
Press X to save changes and exit. The
new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
P, S, A, and M Modes 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the
Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu.
A Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used
to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer
needed.
A The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is
indicated by an icon in the top right corner
of the edit display.
Original
Picture Control icon
160 P, S, A, and M Modes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using Picture Control Utility 2, a
copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or custom
Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the
memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software
and then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to or
from the memory card, or to delete
custom Picture Controls from the
memory card, highlight Load/Save in
the Manage Picture Control menu and
press 2. The following options will be
displayed:
•
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture
Controls from the memory card to
custom Picture Controls C-1 through
C-9 on the camera and name them as
desired.
•
•
Delete from card: Delete selected custom
Picture Controls from the memory card.
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9)
from the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on
the memory card.
A Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.
P, S, A, and M Modes 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Live View
Framing Photographs in the Monitor
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the monitor.
Live view switch
2
3
Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the
focus point over your subject as
Focus point
Focus.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway. The focus point will flash
green while the camera focuses. If the
camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in
green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will
flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the
focus point flashes red; check focus in the monitor before
shooting). Except in i and j modes, exposure can be
locked by pressing the A (L) button.
162 Live View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down. The monitor turns
off and the memory card
access lamp lights during
recording. Do not remove
Memory card access lamp
the battery or memory card until recording is complete. When
shooting is complete, the photograph will be displayed in the
monitor for a few seconds before the camera returns to live
view mode. To exit, rotate the live view switch.
A Live View Zoom Preview
Press the X button to zoom in on the selected focus point to a
maximum magnification of about 8.3×. A navigation window will
appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use
the multi selector to reposition the focus point or press W (Q) to zoom
out. To cancel zoom, press J.
X button
Navigation window
Live View 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focusing in Live View
Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and
position the focus point.
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus Mode)
The following focus modes are available in live view (note that
full-time–servo AF is not available in U, ', and ( modes):
Option
Description
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
For moving subjects. Camera focuses
AF-S Single-servo AF
Full-time-servo continuously until shutter-release button is
AF-F
AF
pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
MF Manual focus
1
Display focus options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
P button
Information display
164 Live View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Picks the Area (AF-Area Mode)
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes
can be selected in live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not
available in %, U, ', and 3 modes):
Option
Description
Use for portraits. The camera
6
7
Face-priority AF
automatically detects and focuses on
portrait subjects.
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and
other non-portrait subjects. Use the multi
selector to select the focus point.
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot
in the frame. A tripod is recommended.
Use if you want focus to track a selected
subject.
Wide-area AF
8
Normal-area AF
9
Subject-tracking AF
1
Display AF-area modes.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the
information display and press J.
P button
Information display
166 Live View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
Choose the focus point.
6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow
border will be displayed when the
camera detects a portrait subject (if
multiple faces are detected, the
camera will focus on the closest
subject; to choose a different subject,
use the multi selector). If the camera
Focus point
can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border
will no longer be displayed.
7/8 (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the
multi selector to move the focus point
anywhere in the frame, or press J to
position the focus point in the center
of the frame.
Focus point
9 (subject-tracking AF): Position the
focus point over your subject and
press J. The focus point will track the
selected subject as it moves through
the frame. To end focus tracking,
press J a second time.
Focus point
Live View 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Live View Display
q
w
e
r
t
y
Item
Description
0
q
w
Shooting mode
the mode dial.
Displayed when On is selected for
Manual movie settings in mode
M.
Manual movie settings
indicator
The amount of time remaining
before live view ends
automatically. Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.
Displayed when On is selected for
e
Time remaining
r
t
Wind noise reduction Movie settings > Wind noise
reduction in the shooting menu.
Microphone sensitivity for movie
recording.
Microphone sensitivity
Sound level for audio recording.
Displayed in red if level is too high;
adjust microphone sensitivity
y
Sound level
accordingly.
168 Live View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
u
i o
!
!
!
!
Item
Description
0
The frame size of movies recorded
in movie mode.
u
Movie frame size
i
o
Focus mode
AF-area mode
The current focus mode.
The current AF-area mode.
Indicates that movies can not be
recorded.
!
!
“No movie” icon
—
Timeremaining(movie The recording time remaining in
mode)
movie mode.
The current focus point. The
display varies with the option
selected for AF-area mode
Indicates whether the photograph
would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings (mode M only).
!
!
Focus point
Exposure indicator
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
Live View 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Live View/Movie Recording Display Options
Press the R button to cycle through display
options as shown below. Circled areas
indicate edges of movie frame crop.
R button
Show detailed photo
indicators
Show movie indicators
Show basic photo indicators *
Hide indicators*
Framing grid*
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie
recording when frame sizes other than 640 × 424 are selected for
Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the shooting menu
movie indicators are displayed).
170 Live View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Camera Settings
Except when movie indicators are displayed,
you can access the following live view
photography settings by pressing the P
indicators are displayed, movie settings can
P button
Information display
A Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would
be obtained when live view is not used. Metering in live view is
adjusted to suit the live view display, producing photographs with
exposure close to what is seen in the monitor (note that exposure
compensation can only be previewed in the monitor at values
between +3 EV and –3 EV). To prevent light entering via the viewfinder
from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we
recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other
A HDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video
device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the
Live View 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Shooting in Live View Mode
Although it will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be
visible in the monitor if the camera is panned horizontally or an object
moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots
may also appear. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using
final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in live view
mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light
sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to
the camera’s internal circuitry.
Live view ends automatically when the monitor is closed (closing the
monitor does not end live view on televisions or other external
displays).
D The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends
circuits). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear
immediately when live view is selected.
172 Live View
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or
darken while the camera focuses. The camera may be unable to focus
in the situations listed below (note that the focus point may
sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus):
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
In addition, the subject-tracking AF may be unable to track subjects if
they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects,
change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large,
too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the
background.
Live View 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording and Viewing Movies
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the monitor.
D The 0 Icon
movies can not be recorded.
Live view switch
A Before Recording
Set aperture before recording in mode
2
Focus.
Frame the opening shot and focus as
described in Steps 2 and 3 of “Framing
that the number of subjects that can be detected in face-
priority AF drops during movie recording.
174 Recording and Viewing Movies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording. A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor. Except in i and j modes,
exposure can be locked by pressing
modes h, P, S, A, and %) altered by
up to 3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV by
pressing the E (N) button and
note that depending on the
Movie-record button
Time remaining
brightness of the subject, changes to
exposure may have no visible effect).
Recording indicator
4
End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.
Recording will end automatically when the maximum length
is reached, the memory card is full, another mode is selected,
or the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end
recording on televisions or other external displays).
A Taking Photographs During Movie Recording
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press
the shutter-release button all the way down and hold it in this position
to take photos during movie recording.
A Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum
Recording and Viewing Movies 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed
through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker
the camera is panned. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright
spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some
areas of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or other
bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid
pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry.
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone may record sounds made by the camera or lens during
autofocus and vibration reduction.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.
Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On
mode M.
176 Recording and Viewing Movies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Movie Settings
adjust the following settings.
•
Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the
following options. The frame rate depends on the option
currently selected for Video mode in the setup menu
Frame size/frame rate
Maximum length
(high movie quality ★/
normal movie quality) 4
Frame size (pixels)
Frame rate 1
L/t
M/u
N/r 1920 × 1080
O/s
P/k
60p 2
50p 3
30p 2
25p 3
24p
60p 2
50p 3
30p 2
25p 3
10 min./
20 min.
20 min./
29 min. 59 s
Q/l
1280 × 720
R/o
S/n
29 min. 59 s/
29 min. 59 s
640 × 424
T/p
1
Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25,
and 23.976 fps respectively.
2
3
4
Available when PAL is selected for Video mode.
Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.
Recording and Viewing Movies 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional stereo
sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity
automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to
select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual
sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.
Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter
for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are
blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may
also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo
microphones can be enabled or disabled using microphone
controls.
A The Live View Display
The movie crop can be viewed during live
view by pressing the R button to select the
“show movie indicators”, “hide indicators”,
“framing grid”, or “show basic photo
indicators are displayed, you can access the
following movie settings by pressing the P
button: movie frame size/quality,
P button
microphone sensitivity, white balance
noise reduction, and exposure
Movie settings > Manual movie settings
Information display
can be adjusted in place of exposure compensation.
178 Recording and Viewing Movies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual
adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the
camera is in mode M. Shutter speed can be set to values as
fast as 1/4000 s; the slowest speed available varies with the
frame rate: 1/30 s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1/50 s for
50p, and 1/60 s for 60p. If shutter speed is not in this range
when live view starts, it will automatically be set to a
supported value, and remain at this value when live view
ends. Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected;
the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically
when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
1
2
Select Movie settings.
Highlight Movie settings in the
shooting menu and press 2.
Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item and press
2, then highlight an option and press
J.
Recording and Viewing Movies 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise
caused by lens vibration being recorded during autofocus.
D The Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends
may appear immediately when movie recording begins. Note that
regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still
end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits
to cool before resuming movie recording.
A HDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video
device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the
180 Recording and Viewing Movies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Movies
Press J to start playback; your current position is indicated by
the movie progress bar.
Current position/
1 icon
Length
total length
Volume
Movie progress bar
Guide
The following operations can be performed:
To
Use
Description
Pause
Pause playback.
Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.
Play
Speed increases with each press, from 2× to
4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to
beginning or end of movie (first frame is
indicated by h in top right corner of
monitor, last frame by i). If playback is
paused, movie rewinds or advances one
frame at a time; hold for continuous rewind
or advance.
Advance/
rewind
Rotate the command dial one stop to skip
ahead or back 10 s.
Skip 10 s
Recording and Viewing Movies 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Option
Description
Create a copy from which the opening or
closing footage has been removed.
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
f
g
Choose start/end point
Save selected frame
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1
2
Display a movie full frame.
Pause the movie on the new
opening or closing frame.
Play the movie back as described on
resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause playback when you reach the
new opening or closing frame.
Movie progress bar
3
Select Choose start/end point.
Press the P button, then highlight
Choose start/end point and press 2.
P button
Recording and Viewing Movies 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Choose the current frame as the new
start or end point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy.
Start point
To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End
point and press J. The frames after the current frame will be
removed when you save the copy.
End point
5
6
Confirm the new start or end point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the command dial one stop).
Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
184 Recording and Viewing Movies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
8
Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1). To abandon
the current copy and return to Step 5,
highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed to
Step 8.
Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file. To
replace the original movie file with
the edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
D Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A Choosing the Role of the Current Frame
To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end point (x) instead of
the new start point (w) or vice versa, press the A (L) button.
A (L) button
Recording and Viewing Movies 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1
Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described on
resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause the movie at the frame you
intend to copy.
2
Choose Save selected frame.
Press the P button, then highlight
Save selected frame and press 2.
P button
3
Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of the
current frame.
186 Recording and Viewing Movies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J to create a
selected frame.
A Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
Recording and Viewing Movies 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback and Deletion
Viewing Pictures
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K
button. The most recent photograph will
be displayed in the monitor.
K button
To
Use
Description
Press 2 to view photographs in
order recorded, 4 to view
photographs in reverse order.
View additional
photographs
View additional
photo info
Press 1 or 3 to view information
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Return to
shooting mode
K /
If current picture is marked with 1
icon to show that it is a movie,
pressing J starts movie playback
Play movie
188 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 12, or 80 images, press
the W (Q) button.
W (Q)
W (Q)
X
X
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Calendar
playback
To
Use
Description
Use multi selector or command dial
to highlight pictures.
Highlight images
View highlighted
image
Press J to display the highlighted
image full frame.
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Return to
shooting mode
K /
190 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button
when 80 images are displayed.
Date list
W (Q)
W (Q)
X
X
Thumbnail list
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail
playback
Calendar
playback
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the
cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list:
To
Use
Description
W (Q)
Press W (Q) or J button in date list
to place cursor in thumbnail list.
Press W (Q) again to return to date
list.
Toggle between
date list and
thumbnail list
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom
in on highlighted
photo
• Date list: Exit to 80-frame playback.
• Thumbnail list: Press and hold X
button to zoom in on highlighted
picture.
X
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
• Date list: Highlight date.
• Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
playback
• Thumbnail list: View highlighted
picture.
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Return to
shooting mode
K /
Playback and Deletion 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo
information as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting
data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback
optional GP-1/GP-1A was used when the photo was taken
File information
None (image only)
Overview
Highlights
Location data
RGB histogram
Shooting data
192 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ File Information
1 2 3
4
11
10
5
6
9
8
7
Protect status.......................... 202
Retouch indicator ................. 289
Upload marking..................... 231
Image size .................................. 92
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
Frame number/total number of
images
File name.................................. 240
5
6
Image quality ............................90
❚❚ Highlights*
1
2
Folder number—frame
number.................................. 238
Image highlights
1
2
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).
Playback and Deletion 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ RGB Histogram
1
2
3
4
5
Histogram (RGB channel). In
all histograms, horizontal
axis gives pixel brightness,
vertical axis number of
pixels.
Histogram (green channel)
Histogram (blue channel)
White balance ........................ 137
White balance
fine-tuning....................... 140
1
2
3
4
5
Histogram (red channel)
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the X
and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out and
scroll the image with the multi selector. The
histogram will be updated to show only the
data for the portion of the image visible in
the monitor.
194 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects
with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
Playback and Deletion 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Shooting Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Metering .................................. 125
Shutter speed......................... 114
Aperture................................... 114
Shooting
Exposure compensation .... 129
Lens VR (vibration
1
2
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
Flash control ........................... 259
Flash compensation............. 131
Camera name
Lens data
10
1
2
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
11
12
13
White balance
fine-tuning ...................... 140
Preset manual..................... 142
Color space.............................. 243
11
12
13
* Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected.
196 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
15
16
17
18
19
Long exposure noise
Active D-Lighting.................. 133
HDR (high dynamic
14
17
18
19
15
16
range)..................................... 135
20
21
20
21
* The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded
Playback and Deletion 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Overview Data
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
1617 18 19 20
21
8
15
28
27
22
26
25 24 23
9
14 13 12 11
10
Metering................................... 125
Shooting
Shutter speed......................... 114
Focal length ............................ 322
Active D-Lighting.................. 133
Picture Control....................... 152
Color space.............................. 243
Frame number/total number 16
1
of images
17
Upload marking .................... 231
2
3
4
5
6
Camera name
19
Image comment
indicator ............................... 273
Location data indicator ...... 283
Histogram showing the
distribution of tones in the
21
22
23
24
25
26
7
8
White balance ........................ 137
White balance
Image quality ............................90
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Image size...................................92
File name ................................. 240
Folder name............................ 238
Rating........................................ 203
fine-tuning........................... 140
Preset manual ........................ 142
Flash compensation............. 131
Exposure compensation..... 129
27
28
1
2
Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
198 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Location Data
Location data are displayed only if an optional GP-1 or GP-1A
In the case of movies, the data give the location at the start of
recording.
1
2
3
4
Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC)
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
4
1
2
3
Playback and Deletion 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-
frame playback. The following operations can be performed
while zoom is in effect:
To
Use
Description
Press X to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 33× (large images),
25× (medium images) or 13× (small
images). Press W (Q) to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not
visible in monitor. Keep multi
selector pressed to scroll rapidly to
other areas of frame. Navigation
window is displayed when zoom
ratio is altered; area currently visible
in monitor is indicated by yellow
border. Bar under navigation
window shows zoom ratio; turns
green at ratio of 1 : 1.
X /
W (Q)
Zoom in or out
View other areas
of image
200 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To
Use
Description
Faces detected during zoom are
indicated by white borders in
navigation window. Press P and use
the multi selector to view other
faces, or press J to zoom in on the
currently selected face. Press P
again to return to normal zoom.
Select/zoom in
on or out from
faces
P
Rotate command dial to view same
location in other images at current
zoom ratio. Playback zoom is
View other
images
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame
playback.
Cancel zoom
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Return to
shooting mode
K /
Playback and Deletion 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, press the
A (L) button to protect the current picture from accidental
deletion. Protected files are marked with a P icon and can not
be deleted using the O button or the Delete option in the
playback menu. Note that protected images will be deleted
protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or
highlight it and press the A (L) button.
A (L) button
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
O buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
202 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.
Rating is not available with protected images.
Rating Individual Pictures
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
2
Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
P button
3
4
Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press 2.
Choose a rating.
Press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of
from zero to five stars, or select ) to
mark the picture as a candidate for
later deletion. Press J to complete
the operation.
Playback and Deletion 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rating Multiple Pictures
Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple
pictures.
1
Select Rating.
Highlight Rating in the playback
menu and press 2.
2
Rate pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight pictures (to
view the currently highlighted picture
full frame, press and hold the X
button) and press 1 or 3 to choose a
rating of from zero to five stars, or
select ) to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
Press J to complete the operation.
204 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete
multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on a
selected date, or all photographs in the current playback folder,
use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once deleted,
photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that are
protected can not be deleted.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1
Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
O button
2
Press the O button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O
button again. To exit without deleting
the photograph, press the K button.
A Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the
Playback and Deletion 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
Option
Selected
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Q
Delete all pictures taken on a selected date
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected
n
Select date
All
R
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture and press the W (Q) button to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button). Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon.
Repeat as desired to select additional
pictures.
W (Q) button
Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
206 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1
Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select
all pictures taken on the highlighted
date. Selected dates are indicated by
check marks. Repeat as desired to
select additional dates; to deselect a
date, highlight it and press 2.
2
Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
Playback and Deletion 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a
1
2
Select Slide show.
Highlight Slide show in the playback
menu and press 2.
Start the slide show.
Highlight Start in the slide show
menu and press J.
The following operations can be performed while the slide
show is in progress:
To
Use
Description
Skip back/
skip ahead
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to
skip to next frame.
View
additional
photo info
Pause slide show. Select Restart to
resume.
Pause
Raise/lower
volume
Exit to
X /
Press X during movie playback to increase
W (Q) volume, W (Q) to decrease.
playback
mode
K
End show and return to playback mode.
208 Playback and Deletion
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The dialog shown at right is displayed
when the show ends. Select Restart to
restart or Exit to return to the playback
menu.
Slide Show Options
Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide
show menu to select the images displayed by type or rating and
choose how long each image is displayed.
•
Image type: Choose from Still images
and movies, Still images only,
Movies only, and By rating. To
include only pictures with selected
ratings, highlight By rating and press
2. A list of ratings will be displayed;
highlight ratings and press 2 to select
or deselect pictures with the
highlighted rating for inclusion in the
slide show. Selected ratings are
indicated by a check mark. Press J to
exit when the desired ratings are selected.
•
Frame interval: Choose how long still
images are displayed.
Playback and Deletion 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Installing ViewNX 2
To upload, view, edit, and share photos and movies, download
the ViewNX 2 installer from the following website and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete installation. An Internet
connection is required. For system requirements and other
http://nikonimglib.com/nvnx/
Nikon also offers Capture NX-D image fine-tuning software,
available for download from:
http://nikonimglib.com/ncnxd/
A Capture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D also offers an Image Dust Off feature that processes NEF
(RAW) images to remove image artifacts caused by dust inside the
camera.
D Use the Latest Versions
Be sure to use the latest version. Using a version that does not support
your camera may result in difficulties copying NEF (RAW) images to
your computer.
210 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using ViewNX 2
Copy Pictures to the Computer
1
Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown
and then turn the camera on.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.
A Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting
interface cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
D USB Hubs
Transfer may not proceed as expected if the camera is connected
via a USB hub or keyboard.
Connections 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a
program, select Nikon Transfer 2.
A Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1 Under Import pictures and videos,
click Change program. A program
selection dialog will be displayed;
select Import File using Nikon
Transfer 2 and click OK.
2 Double-click Import File.
A Windows 8.1
Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay
prompt when the camera is connected.
Tap or click the dialog and then tap or
click Import File/Nikon Transfer 2 to
select Nikon Transfer 2.
212 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, pictures on the memory card will be
copied to the computer.
Start Transfer
Terminate the connection.
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and
disconnect the USB cable.
A For More Information
Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.
Connections 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Photographs
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. Do not use
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen
will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge
playback display.
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
D Date Imprint
If you select On for Print date in the PictBridge menu when printing
photographs containing date information recorded using Custom
imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are
cropped or printed without a border.
214 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X button
to zoom in on the current frame (press K to exit zoom). To
view eight pictures at a time, press the W (Q) button. Use the
multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X to display the
highlighted picture full frame.
2
Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default
option, select Printer default). After selecting an option,
press J to return to the printer settings menu.
Option
Description
Page size Choose a page size.
This option is listed only when pictures are printed
No. of copies one at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of
copies (maximum 99).
Border
Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
Choose whether to print the times and dates of
recordings on photos.
Print date
This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No
cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog
will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the
crop, W (Q) to decrease, and use the multi selector to
position the crop. Note that print quality may drop if
small crops are printed at large sizes.
Cropping
Connections 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.
Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.
2
Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures for printing. Press 4 or 2 to scroll
through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold theX button) and press 1 or 3 to
choose the number of prints. To deselect a picture, set the
number of prints to zero.
• Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a
selected date. Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date and press 2
to select or deselect. To view the pictures taken on the
selected date, press W (Q). Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures, or press and hold X to view the
current picture full screen. Press W (Q) again to return to
the date selection dialog.
order can be viewed and modified before printing as
described in the description for Print select, above.
• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the
memory card, proceed to Step 3. Note that if the memory
card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256
images will be printed. A warning will be displayed if the
page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index print.
216 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Adjust printer settings.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 215.
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.
Connections 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers
1
Choose DPOF print order >
Select/set.
Select DPOF print order in the
playback menu, then highlight
Select/set and press 2 (to remove all
photographs from the print order,
select Deselect all).
2
Select pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the
pictures on the memory card (to view
the highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button) and
press 1 or 3 to choose the number of
prints (maximum 99). To deselect a picture, set the number of
prints to zero. Press J when all the desired pictures have
been selected.
218 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2 to toggle the highlighted
option on or off.
• Print shooting data: Print shutter speed
and aperture on all pictures in print
order.
• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.
Complete the print order.
Press J to complete the print order.
D DPOF Print Order
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the
PictBridge Print date option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough
space on the memory card to store the print order.
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
Connections 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Pictures on TV
The supplied audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the
camera to a television or video recorder for playback or
recording. The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface
separately from third-party suppliers) can be used to connect
the camera to high-definition video devices.
Standard Definition Devices
Before connecting the A/V cable to a standard television as
matches that used in the TV. Always turn the camera off before
connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.
Audio (red)
Audio (white)
Video (yellow)
Connect to
camera
Connect to video device
Tune the television to the video channel, then turn the camera
on and press the K button. During playback, images will be
displayed on the television screen. Note that the edges of
images may not be displayed.
220 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using an HDMI
cable as shown. Always turn the camera off before connecting
or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
Connect to
Connect to high-definition device
camera
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
Tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera on
and press the K button. During playback, images will be
displayed on the high-definition television or monitor screen.
Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.
A Playback Volume
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls
can not be used.
222 Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Choosing an Output Resolution
To choose the format for images output
to the HDMI device, select HDMI >
Output resolution in the camera setup
camera will automatically select the
appropriate format.
❚❚ Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television are on,
the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi
selector and J button during full-frame playback and slide
shows. If Off is selected, the television remote can not be used
to control the camera, but the camera can be used to shoot
photographs and movies in live view.
A HDMI-CEC Devices
HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer
Electronics Control) is a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used
to control peripherals to which they are connected. When the camera
is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the viewfinder
in place of the number of exposures remaining.
A 1920 × 1080 60p/50p
Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings
> Frame size/frame rate may cause variations in the resolution and
frame rate of the data output to HDMI devices during recording.
indicators will not be displayed.
D HDMI > Output Resolution
Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920
× 1080; 50p. Some devices may not support an Output resolution
setting of Auto; in this case, select 1080i (interlaced).
Connections 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi wireless networks to a smart
device running Nikon’s dedicated Wireless Mobile Utility app
Download pictures
Share pictures
Remote control
A Installing the App
1 Find the app.
On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App
Store, or another app marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile
Utility”. For more information, see the instructions provided with
the smart device.
2 Install the app.
Read the app description and install the app. A pdf manual for the
Wireless Mobile Utility is available for download at the following
URLs:
•
•
Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/
iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/
Android
iOS
224 Wi-Fi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Camera
Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless
Mobile Utility on your Android or iOS smart device. Instructions
for accessing the camera vary with the type of connection used
by the smart device.
Android
•
Push-button WPS: If the smart device supports push-button WPS
(i.e., has a WPS button connection option in its Wi-Fi
settings menu), you can use this easy method to connect to
•
•
PIN-entry WPS: If the smart device supports WPS, you can use
the camera to establish a connection by entering the PIN
View SSID: If the smart device does not support WPS, you can
connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart device
iOS
•
View SSID: Connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart
D Security
If you do not use WPS when connecting for the first time, the
connection will not be protected by a password or other form of
security. Security settings can be configured in the Wireless Mobile
Utility once a connection is established. More information can be
found in the Wireless Mobile Utility manual, which is available for
download in pdf format from the following URLs:
• Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/
• iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/
Wi-Fi 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WPS (Android Only)
1
Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2. Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J. Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2
Connect.
Enable WPS button connections on the camera and smart
device:
• Camera: Highlight Network settings
and press 2.
Highlight Push-button WPS and
press 2 to ready the camera for a
WPS connection. The camera will
wait about two minutes for a WPS
connection request from the smart
device. To extend the wait time,
press J.
• Smart device: Select Wi-Fi settings > WPS button
connection.
226 Wi-Fi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The
main dialog will be displayed.
Wi-Fi 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIN Entry (Android Only)
1
Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2. Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J. Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2
Select Network settings > PIN-entry WPS.
Highlight Network settings and
press 2.
Highlight PIN-entry WPS and press
2.
3
4
Enter the PIN.
Enter the PIN displayed by the smart device. Press 4 or 2 to
highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J when
entry is complete.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The
main dialog will be displayed.
228 Wi-Fi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSID (Android and iOS)
1
Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2. Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J. Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2
Display the camera SSID.
Highlight Network settings and
press 2.
Highlight View SSID and press 2.
3
4
Select the camera SSID.
Select the camera SSID in the list of networks displayed by
the smart device.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The
main dialog will be displayed.
Wi-Fi 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Terminating the Connection
Wi-Fi can be disabled by:
•
Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the
camera setup menu
•
•
Starting movie recording
Turning the camera off
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network
settings > Reset network settings. A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to restore default
network settings.
A The Wi-Fi Display
While Wi-Fi is enabled, a c icon will flash in
the information display. The icon will stop
flashing once a connection has been
established and the camera is exchanging
data with the smart device.
D Wi-Fi
To disable Wi-Fi in settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi >
Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu. Note that
Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that the
standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on
the smart device is communicating with the camera. If no data are
exchanged for about 5 minutes, the standby timer will turn off. The
camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card is inserted
and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected. To
prevent loss of power while connected, charge the battery before
enabling the network connection.
230 Wi-Fi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart
device. Movies can not be selected for upload.
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail or calendar playback.
2
Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
P button
3
Choose Select to send to smart
device/deselect.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device/deselect and press J.
Pictures selected for upload are
indicated by a & icon; to deselect,
display or highlight the image and
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Wi-Fi 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload
To change the upload status of multiple pictures, use the Select
to send to smart device option in the playback menu.
1
2
Choose Select to send to smart
device.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device in the playback menu and
press 2.
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures and press W (Q) to select or
deselect (to view the highlighted
picture full screen, press and hold the
X button). Selected pictures are
marked by a & icon.
W (Q) button
3
Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
232 Wi-Fi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Menus
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D
(playback menu) tab.
G button
Playback Menu Options
The playback menu contains the following options:
Option
Default
—
All
0
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
Auto image rotation
Rotate tall
—
On
On
On
Slide show
Image type
Still images and movies
Frame interval
DPOF print order
Rating
2 s
—
—
—
Select to send to smart device
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback Folder
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose a folder for playback:
Option
Description
Pictures in all folders created with the D5500 will be visible
during playback.
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage
D5500
All
playback.
Playback Display Options
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose the information available in the
playback photo information display
press 2 to select or deselect. Selected
items are indicated by check marks. To
return to the playback menu, press J.
Image Review
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting.
234 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Image Rotation
G button ➜ D playback menu
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback or when viewed in ViewNX 2 or Capture NX-D
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counterclockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.
Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with
the lens pointing up or down.
A Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option.
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D playback menu
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display in the monitor (pictures taken
with Off selected for Auto image rotation will still be displayed
in landscape orientation). Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images
are not rotated automatically during image review.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the
C (shooting menu) tab.
G button
Shooting Menu Options
The shooting menu contains the following options:
Option
Reset shooting menu
Storage folder
File naming
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
ISO sensitivity settings
Default
—
—
0
237
238
DSC
JPEG normal
Large
14-bit
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M
Other modes
100
Auto
Auto ISO sensitivity control
White balance
Fluorescent
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
HDR (high dynamic range)
Off
Auto
158
Cool-white fluorescent
Standard
—
sRGB
Auto
Off
236 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Default
0
Release mode
m, w
Other modes
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Interval timer shooting
Start options
Continuous H
Single frame
Off
Normal
Normal
Off
Now
1 min.
1
103
Interval
Number of times
Exposure smoothing
Movie settings
Frame size/frame rate
Movie quality
Microphone
Wind noise reduction
Manual movie settings
Off
*
—
Normal
Auto sensitivity
Off
Off
* Default varies with country of purchase.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Reset Shooting Menu
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage Folder
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ Selecting Folders by Folder Number
1
2
Choose Select folder by number.
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.
Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main
menu (to exit without choosing the storage folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
238 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Selecting Folders from a List
1
Choose Select folder from list.
Highlight Select folder from list and
press 2.
2
3
Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
main menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a
folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a
number less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
File Naming
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or,
in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space
letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option
is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the
A Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG”
for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference
data. In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of
NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names
but different extensions.
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Choose the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12
bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14
bits, producing larger files but increasing the
amount of color data recorded.
(
)
12-bit
14-bit
240 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ C shooting menu
❚❚ Auto ISO Sensitivity control
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M
modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected by the user. The maximum value
for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum
sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control menu
(choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines), but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected
by the user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity,
the value selected by the user will be used instead; the minimum
value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100). In
modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure
would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed (1/2000–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, sensitivity will be
adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by
the user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the
focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can be
fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2). Slower
shutter speeds will be used only if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum
sensitivity.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When On is selected, the viewfinder
shows ISO AUTO and the information
display ISO-A. These indicators flash when
sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user.
A Maximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed
When auto ISO sensitivity control is
enabled, the ISO sensitivity and shutter
speed graphics in the information
display show the maximum sensitivity
and minimum shutter speed.
Minimum shutter speed
Maximum sensitivity
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at
higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination
with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the
camera from selecting slow shutter speeds. Auto ISO sensitivity
other modes, the value selected for ISO sensitivity will be used for
pictures taken with the built-in flash or optional flash units.
242 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Space
G button ➜ C shooting menu
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for general-purpose
printing and display; Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of
colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.
Regardless of the option selected, movies are recorded in sRGB.
A Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
A Color Space
color space when opening photographs created with this camera.
Results can not be guaranteed with third-party software.
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots
or fog). The time required for processing roughly doubles;
during processing, “l m” will flash in the viewfinder and
pictures can not be taken (noise reduction will not be performed
if the camera is turned off before processing is complete).
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise.”
Option
Description
High Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly
in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
Normal
Low
Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at
an amount higher than when Low is selected.
Off
Vignette Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a
photograph. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E,
and D lenses (PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to
lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose
from High, Normal, Low, and Off.
A Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness,
while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have
been modified from default settings may not produce the desired
effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette
lenses that support FX format.
244 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wide-
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos
taken with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in
the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and
that the time needed to process photographs before recording
begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and
is available only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and
certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with
other lenses.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
G button
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Reset custom
246 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Settings
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
Default
0
a
a1 AF-C priority selection
a2 Number of focus points
a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator
a4 Rangefinder
Focus
39 points
On
Off
b
Exposure
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl
b2 ISO display
1/3 step
Off
c
Timers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
c2 Auto off timers
Off
Normal
c3 Self-timer
Self-timer delay: 10 s;
number of shots: 1
1 min
c4 Remote on duration (ML-L3)
d
Shooting/display
d1 Exposure delay mode
d2 File number sequence
d3 Viewfinder grid display
d4 Date stamp
Off
Off
Off
Off
d5 Reverse indicators
e
Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash/
Optional flash
e2 Auto bracketing set
TTL
AE bracketing
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Custom Setting
Controls
Default
0
f
f1 Assign Fn button
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f3 Assign touch Fn
ISO sensitivity
AE/AF lock
Viewfinder grid display
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
f4 Reverse dial rotation
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Reset Custom Settings
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever
the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only
when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Option
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
G
Release
Photos can only be taken once the camera has
focused.
F
Focus
248 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a2: Number of Focus Points
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-
point selection.
Option
Description
Choose from the 39 focus
points shown at right.
#
A
39 points
Choose from the 11 focus
points shown at right.
Use for quick focus-point
selection.
11 points
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist
illuminator lights to assist the focus
operation when lighting is poor.
AF-assist illuminator
Option
Description
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for
more information, see page 352).
On
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus
operation. The camera may not be able to focus using
autofocus when lighting is poor.
Off
250 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a4: Rangefinder
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether
note that this function is not available in shooting mode M, when
the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject is
correctly exposed).
Indicator
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is slightly in front of subject.
Focus point is well in front of subject.
Focus point is slightly behind subject.
Focus point is well behind subject.
Camera can not determine correct focus.
A Using the Electronic Rangefinder
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of
f/5.6 or faster. The desired results may not be achieved in situations in
The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b: Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter
speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and
bracketing.
b2: ISO Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of
the number of exposures remaining.
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
252 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c2: Auto off Timers
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no
operations are performed during menu display and playback
(Playback/menus), while photographs are displayed in the
monitor after shooting (Image review), and during live view
(Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and
information display remain on when no operations are
performed (Standby timer). Choose shorter auto-off delays to
reduce the drain on the battery.
Option
Description (all times are approximate)
Auto off timers are set to the following values:
Playback/
menus
20 s
5 min.
10 min.
Image
review
4 s
4 s
20 s
Standby
timer
4 s
8 s
1 min.
Live view
C Short
D Normal
E Long
Short
Normal
Long
5 min.
10 min.
20 min.
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image
F Custom review, Live view, and Standby timer. When settings
are complete, press J.
A Auto off Timers
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the
camera is connected to a computer or printer via USB.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c3: Self-Timer
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number
of shots taken.
•
•
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1
to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at
intervals of about 4 seconds).
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the
optional ML-L3 remote control before cancelling remote release
mode. Choose shorter times for longer battery life. This setting
applies only during viewfinder photography.
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, select On to delay shutter release until about 1 s after
the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised.
254 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d2: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by
adding one to the last file number used. This option controls
whether file numbering continues from the last number used
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a
new memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering
continues from the last number used or from the largest file
number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is
inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current
folder contains 999 photographs.
On
Off
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned
a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the
current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to
0001.
Reset
D File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d2 (File number sequence) and
then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory
card.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d3: Viewfinder Grid Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for
d4: Date Stamp
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they
are taken. Date stamps can not be added to or removed from
existing photos.
Option
Description
Off
The time and date do not appear on photographs.
The date or date and time
are imprinted on
a
Date
15.10.2014
photographs taken while
this option is in effect.
Date and
time
b
15.10.2014 10:02
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp
showing the number of days between the date of
shooting and a selected date (see below).
Date
counter
c
At settings other than Off, the selected
option is indicated by a d icon in the
information display.
A Date Stamp
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date
not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images.
256 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Date Counter
Pictures taken while this option is in
effect are imprinted with the number of
days remaining until a future date or the
number of days elapsed since a past date.
Use it to track the growth of a child or
count down the days until a birthday or
wedding.
02 / 15.10.2014
02 / 19.10.2014
Past date (two days elapsed)
Future date (two days remaining)
The camera offers three slots for storing dates.
1
Enter the first date.
The first time you select Date counter,
you will be prompted to enter a date
for the first slot. Enter a date using the
multi selector and press J to exit to
the date list.
2
3
Enter additional dates or edit
existing dates.
To change a date or enter additional
dates, highlight a slot, press 2, and
enter a date as described above.
Choose a date.
Highlight a slot in the date list and press J.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
5
Choose a date counter format.
Highlight Display options and press
2, then highlight a date format and
press J.
Exit the date counter menu.
Press J to exit the date counter menu.
d5: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in
the viewfinder and information display are displayed with
positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Select
(W) to display negative values on
the left and positive values on the right.
258 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M
modes. When an optional SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash unit is
attached and turned on, this option changes to Optional flash
and is used to choose the flash mode for the optional flash unit.
Option
1 TTL
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response
to shooting conditions.
Choose a flash level. At full power, the built-in
flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft., ISO 100,
20 °C/68 °F).
2
Manual
This option is available when an optional SB-500
flash unit is mounted on the camera accessory
shoe. In commander mode, the SB-500 functions
as a master flash for wireless remote control of
Commander
mode
4
A Manual
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0
flashes in the information display when
Manual is selected and the flash is raised.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A TTL Flash Control
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is
• i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel
RGB sensor is used to adjust flash output for a natural balance
between the main subject and the background.
• Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the
main subject; the brightness of the background is not taken into
account.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when
selected with the optional flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR is used in all other cases.
❚❚ Commander Mode
When an optional SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the accessory
shoe, select Commander mode to use the SB-500 as a master
flash controlling one or more remote optional flash units in up to
Selecting this option displays the menu
shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to highlight
the following options, 1 or 3 to change.
260 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Optional
flash
Description
Choose a flash mode for the master (commander) flash.
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values
TTL
M
1
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of
/3 EV.
Choose the flash level.
Only the remote flash units fire; the master flash does not,
although it does emit monitor pre-flashes.
– –
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values
TTL
1
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of
/3 EV.
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units;
AA
1
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of
/3 EV.
M
Choose the flash level.
– –
The flash units in this group do not fire.
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The
Group B options available are the same as those listed for Group A,
above.
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups
must be set to the same channel.
Channel
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander
mode.
1
2
3
4
5
Adjust settings for the master flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the master flash. Note
that output level can not be adjusted
in – – mode.
Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in
group A.
Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in
group B.
Select the channel.
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, select channel 3.
Press J.
262 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown
below. Note that the maximum distance at which the remote
flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.
Group A: 10 m/32 ft or less
Group B: 7 m/22 ft or less
60 ° or less
Master flash
(SB-500, mounted on camera)
Wireless remote sensors on flash units
should face camera
7
8
Configure the remote flash units.
Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as
desired, and set them to the channel selected in Step 4. See
the flash unit instruction manuals for details.
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the
flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit, frame the
photograph, focus, and shoot.
A The Flash Sync Mode Display
M does not appear in the information display when – – is selected for
Optional flash > Mode.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Flash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) and E (N)
buttons and command dial is added to the flash compensation values
selected for the master flash, group A, and group B in the Commander
mode menu. A Y icon is displayed in the viewfinder when a flash
compensation value other than 0 is selected for the master or remote
flash units in TTL or AA mode. The Y icon flashes when the master
flash is in mode M.
D Commander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is
not mounted on a tripod). The remote flash units should normally be
placed closer to the subject than to the camera. Be sure that direct
light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the
camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units
(AA mode), as this may interfere with exposure. To prevent timing
flashes emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs
taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures
(high f-numbers) or rotate the flash head on the master flash to point
upwards. After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and
view the results in the camera monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that
may be used, the practical maximum is three. With more than this
number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance.
e2: Auto Bracketing Set
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active
264 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f: Controls
f1: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the Fn button.
Fn button
Option
Description
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select image quality and size
Image
quality/size
v
w
ISO
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select white balance (P, S, A, and M
White
balance
m
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select Active D-Lighting (P, S, A,
Active
D-Lighting
!
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to adjust HDR (P, S, A, and M modes
$
HDR
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal,
or JPEG basic, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the Fn button is
&
+NEF (RAW) pressed. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW)
copy, press the Fn button again. This option has no
effect in the following special effects modes: %, S,
T, U, ', (, and 3.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to choose the bracketing increment
(exposure and white balance bracketing) or to turn
ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only;
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
Press the Fn button to
Auto
bracketing
t
"
AF-area
mode
display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
Viewfinder
grid display
'
Press the Fn button to display the Wi-Fi menu
c
Wi-Fi
266 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the A (L)
button.
A (L) button
Option
Description
Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button
is pressed.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
B
C
AE/AF lock
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is
AE lock
(Hold)
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
E
F
AF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
The A (L) button initiates autofocus. The
shutter-release button can not be used to focus.
A
AF-ON
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f3: Assign Touch Fn
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
A touch-sensitive area of the monitor can be used to control the
camera after the monitor has turned off automatically. The
position of this “touch Fn” area varies with the position of the
monitor; the role it plays can be chosen from the options in the
table below. Slide your finger left or right across the area
indicated in the illustration to adjust the chosen option (note
that touch Fn is not available when the monitor is facing
forward). If you find that your face contacts the touch Fn area
when you look through the viewfinder, use the monitor in the
extended position.
Touch Fn area
Monitor in normal position
Monitor extended
Description
Option
When an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is
Focus-point selected for AF-area mode, you can slide a finger
#
selection
over the touch Fn area to position the focus point
ISO
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust ISO
w
!
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust
Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only;
Active
D-Lighting
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust HDR
$
HDR
268 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose the
bracketing increment (exposure and white
bracketing balance bracketing) or to turn ADL bracketing on
Auto
t
"
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose an
AF-area
mode
Tap the touch Fn area to
display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
Viewfinder
grid display
'
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust
Disable touch Fn.
%
Aperture
None
D Touch Fn
Touch Fn is available only if Enable is selected for Touch controls
f4: Reverse Dial Rotation
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dial when it is used to make
adjustments to exposure or flash
compensation (Exposure
compensation) and/or shutter speed
and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture).
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect, then press
J.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
G button
Setup Menu Options
The setup menu contains the following options:
Option
Format memory card
Image comment
Copyright information
Time zone and date 1
Daylight saving time
Language 1
Default
—
—
0
272
273
274
—
Off
—
275
Beep options
Beep on/off
Pitch
Touch controls
On
Low
Enable
0
276
Monitor brightness
Info display format
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS
P/S/A/M
Auto info display
Info display auto off
Clean image sensor
Clean at startup/shutdown
Graphic
Graphic
On
On
Clean at startup &
shutdown
270 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Lock mirror up for cleaning
Image Dust Off ref photo
Flicker reduction
Slot empty release lock
Video mode 1
Default
—
—
Auto
Release locked
—
0
2
340
279
281
HDMI
Output resolution
Device control
Auto
On
Accessory terminal
Remote control
Remote shutter release
Assign Fn button
Location data
Take photos
Standby timer
Set clock from satellite
Wi-Fi
Enable
Yes
Network connection
Network settings
Eye-Fi upload 3
Conformity marking
Firmware version
Disable
—
Enable
—
285
285
—
1
2
3
Default varies with country of purchase.
Not available when battery is low.
Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B setup menu
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
formatted in other devices. Format the card as described below.
D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may
contain. Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to
1
Highlight Yes.
To exit without formatting the
memory card, highlight No and press
J.
2
Press J.
A message will be displayed while the
card is formatted. Do not remove the
memory card or remove or disconnect
the power source until formatting is
complete.
272 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Comment
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 or
The following options are available:
•
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
Attach comment: Select this option to
•
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Attach comment can
be turned on and off by highlighting it
and pressing 2. After choosing the
desired setting, press J to exit.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copyright Information
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken. Copyright information is included in the shooting data
The following options are available:
•
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
characters long.
•
•
Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright
information to all subsequent
photographs. Attach copyright
information can be turned on and off
by highlighting it and pressing 2.
After choosing the desired setting,
press J to exit.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or
transferring the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept
liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the
Copyright information option.
274 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜ B setup menu
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option
Time zone
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is
automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year
are displayed.
Date and time
Date format
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera
clock will automatically be advanced or set back one
hour.
Daylight saving
time
Language
G button ➜ B setup menu
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beep Options
G button ➜ B setup menu
Beeps sound when the camera focuses, in self-timer and remote-
control modes, and when touch-screen controls are used.
❚❚ Beep On/Off
Select Off (touch controls only) to mute
the sounds the camera makes in
response to touch-screen controls, or
choose Off to prevent beeps from
sounding altogether.
❚❚ Pitch
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the sounds made in response
to focus, self-timer, and remote-control operations.
Touch Controls
G button ➜ B setup menu
Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen
controls in playback mode only.
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜ B setup menu
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
276 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Info Display Format
G button ➜ B setup menu
chosen separately for auto, scene, and special effects modes and
for P, S, A, and M modes.
Classic
Graphic
1
2
Select a shooting mode option.
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or
P/S/A/M and press 2.
Select a design.
Highlight a design and press J.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Info Display
G button ➜ B setup menu
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If Off is selected, the
information display can be viewed by pressing the R button.
Info Display Auto Off
G button ➜ B setup menu
If On is selected, the eye sensor will turn the information display
off when you put your eye to the viewfinder. Selecting Off
prevents the display turning off when you look through the
viewfinder, but also increases the drain on the battery.
278 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜ B setup menu
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D on-line help).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera. A lens with a focal length of at least
50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the
way in.
1
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options
and press J. To exit without
acquiring image dust off data, press
G.
• Start: The message shown at right
will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting. The message shown
at right will be displayed and “rEF”
will appear in the viewfinder when cleaning is complete.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken
after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and
then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be
used with existing photographs.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button
halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
If the reference object is too bright or
too dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will
be displayed. Choose another
reference object and repeat the
process from step 1.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or
at different apertures. Reference images can
not be viewed using computer imaging
software. A grid pattern is displayed when
reference images are viewed on the camera.
280 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜ B setup menu
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match
the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
A Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz
options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright, in which case you should select mode A or M and choose a
smaller aperture (higher f-number) before starting live view. Note that
flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜ B setup menu
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in
demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release
button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the
camera.
Video Mode
G button ➜ B setup menu
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the
camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or
PAL).
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessory Terminal
G button ➜ B setup menu
Choose the role of the optional accessory connected to the
accessory terminal.
❚❚ Remote Control
Choose the functions performed using a remote cord or wireless
Remote Shutter Release
Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used for photography or movie recording.
Option
Description
The shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used to take photographs.
The shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used for movie recording. Press the
button halfway to start live view or to focus in
AF-S and AF-F modes. Press the button all the
way down to start or end recording. Use the
camera live view switch to end live view.
y
z
Take photos
Record movies
Assign Fn button
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote
controllers.
Option
Description
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller
performs the function currently assigned to the
Same as camera
4 button
=4
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller
can be used to start and end live view.
a
Live view
282 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Location Data
This item is used to adjust settings for optional GP-1 or GP-1A
device, allowing information on the camera’s current position to
be recorded when photographs are taken (turn the camera off
before connecting the unit; for more information, see the
manual provided with the device).
The Location data menu contains the options listed below.
•
Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off
automatically when the unit is attached.
Option
Description
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations
are performed for the time selected for Custom Setting c2
Enable camera time to acquire location data, the delay is
extended by up to one minute after standby timer is
activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the
drain on the battery.
Exposure meters do not turn off while the unit is
connected.
Disable
•
•
Position: This item is only available if a GP-1 or GP-1A is
connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude,
altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by
the unit.
Set clock from satellite: Choose Yes to set the camera clock based
on the time provided by the satellite navigation system.
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the location data satellite system and is
independent of the camera clock.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Satellite Signal Indicator
Connection status is shown in the
information display as follows:
• % (static): The camera has established
communication with the GP-1/GP-1A.
• % (flashing): The GP-1/GP-1A is searching
for a signal. Pictures taken while the icon is
flashing do not include location data.
• No icon: No new location data have been received from the GP-1/
GP-1A for at least two seconds. Pictures taken when the % icon is
not displayed do not include location data.
Eye-Fi Upload
G button ➜ B setup menu
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the
camera. Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected
destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal
strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status
is indicated by an icon in the information
display:
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no
pictures available for upload.
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled;
waiting to begin upload.
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• g: Error.
284 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Eye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected. If a
remove the card.
30 s or more when using an Eye-Fi card.
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries
to the manufacturer. The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on
and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.
Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult
the manufacturer for more information. Eye-Fi cards are for use only in
the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been
updated to the latest version.
Conformity Marking
G button ➜ B setup menu
View the standards with which the camera complies.
Firmware Version
G button ➜ B setup menu
View the current camera firmware version.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N
(retouch menu) tab.
G button
Retouch Menu Options
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
0
0
Option
Option
NEF (RAW)
processing
Trim
Resize
l
o
q
U
Monochrome
Image overlay
Color outline
Photo illustration
Color sketch
Miniature effect
Selective color
Painting
0
k
1
i
2
j
e
D-Lighting
g
u
3
Quick retouch
Red-eye correction
Straighten
Distortion control
Perspective control
Fisheye
)
(
r
)
m
f
Edit movie
Side-by-side
p
*
comparison
Filter effects
* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting
Retouch in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is
displayed.
286 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit
movie > Choose start/end point, each option can be applied only
once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and
unavailable.
A Image Quality and Size
Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies
created from JPEG images are the same size as the original, while
copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-quality
JPEG images.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1
Display retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in the
retouch menu and press 2.
2
Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J (to
view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button).
A Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created
with other devices. If the image was recorded at image quality
the RAW copy.
3
Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
288 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Except in the photo information
retouched copies are indicated by a Z
icon.
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback
To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in full-
and select a retouch option (Image overlay excluded).
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1
2
Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in
the retouch menu and press 2 to
display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera.
Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
photograph (to view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press and hold
the X button). Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and proceed
to the next step.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with pictures created with
compensation may differ from those that might have been
expected when the photograph was taken.
4
Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected
photograph. To exit without copying
the photograph, press the G
button.
290 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trim
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph. The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as
described in the following table.
To
Use
Description
Press the X button to increase the size of the
crop.
Increase size of
crop
X
Reduce size of
crop
Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of
the crop.
W (Q)
Change crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the command dial to choose the
aspect ratio.
Move crop
Create copy
A Image Size
Use multi selector to position the crop.
Save the current crop as a separate file.
The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio)
appears at upper left in the crop display.
A Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
1
Select Resize.
To resize selected images, highlight
Resize in the retouch menu and press
2.
2
Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
292 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector and press the W (Q) button
to select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button). Selected
pictures are marked by a 1 icon.
Press J when the selection is
complete.
W (Q) button
4
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed. Highlight Yes and press J
to save the resized copies.
A Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are
displayed.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-Lighting
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
D-Lighting
D-Lighting
(portrait subject)
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the
effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the
photograph.
❚❚ Portrait Subjects
If Portrait subjects is selected, the
camera will apply D-Lighting only to
human portrait subjects, brightening up
to three such subjects while leaving the
background untouched for an effect
similar to that achieved with a reflector.
A Portrait Subjects
The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait
D-Lighting (note that portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos
taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation in the playback
posed, the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied,
remove the check from Portrait subjects.
294 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Retouch
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies with enhanced saturation
and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as
required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
enhancement. Press J to copy the
photograph.
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N retouch menu
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and
is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
press J to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not
always produce the expected results and may in very rare
circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before
proceeding.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Straighten
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a straightened copy of the
selected image. Press 2 to rotate the
image clockwise by up to five degrees in
increments of approximately 0.25
degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise
(note that edges of the image will be
trimmed to create a rectangular copy). Press J to save the
retouched copy.
Distortion Control
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is
not available with photos taken using auto distortion control;
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion
distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion control result
in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the
retouched copy.
D Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses
(PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not
guaranteed with other lenses.
296 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perspective Control
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts
of perspective control result in more of
the edges being cropped out). Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Before
After
Fisheye
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies that appear to have been
taken with a fisheye lens. Press 2 to
increase the effect (this also increases the
amount that will be cropped out at the
edges of the image), 4 to reduce it. Press
J to save the retouched copy.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filter Effects
G button ➜ N retouch menu
After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy
the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a
Skylight
skylight filter, making the
picture less blue.
Creates a copy with warm
Warm filter tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast.
Add starburst effects to
light sources.
• Number of points: Choose
from four, six, or eight.
• Filter amount: Choose the
brightness of the light
sources affected.
Cross screen
• Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
• Length of points: Choose the length of points.
• Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter. Press X to
preview the copy full frame.
• Save: Create a retouched copy.
Add a soft filter effect. Press
4 or 2 to choose the filter
strength.
Soft
298 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monochrome
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a
preview of the selected image; press 1
to increase color saturation, 3 to
decrease. Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Increase saturation
Decrease saturation
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Overlay
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging
application. The new picture is saved at current image quality
and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality
(RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
+
1
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted;
press J to display a list of the NEF
(RAW) pictures created with this
camera.
300 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay. To
view the highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X button.
Press J to select the highlighted
photograph and return to the preview display.
3
4
Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as
described in Step 2.
Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and
optimize exposure for the overlay by
pressing 1 or 3 to select gain from
values between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat
for the second image. The default
value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5
Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition as shown
at right, press 4 or 2 to place the
cursor in the Preview column, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay
and press J (note that colors and
brightness in the preview may differ from the final image). To
save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save. To
return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W (Q).
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay. After an
overlay is created, the resulting image
will be displayed full-frame in the
monitor.
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit depth can be
photograph selected for Image 1. The current image comment is
appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information,
however, is not copied.
Color Outline
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create an outline copy of a photograph
to use as a base for painting. Press J to
save the retouched copy.
Before
After
302 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Photo Illustration
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring
for a poster effect. Press 2 or 4 to make
outlines thicker or thinner. Press J to
save the retouched copy.
Before
After
Color Sketch
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy of a photograph that
resembles a sketch made with colored
pencils. Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or 2
to change. Vividness can be increased to
make colors more saturated, or
decreased for a washed-out,
monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or
thinner. Thicker outlines make colors more saturated. Press J
to save the retouched copy.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Miniature Effect
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works
best with photos taken from a high vantage point. The area that
will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.
To
Press
Description
Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is
in focus.
Choose
orientation
W (Q)
If area of effect is in
wide orientation, press
1 or 3 to position
frame showing area of
copy that will be in
focus.
Choose area
in focus
Area in focus
If area of effect is in tall
orientation, press 4 or
2 to position frame
showing area of copy
that will be in focus.
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or
2 to choose height.
Choose size
Create copy
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or
3 to choose width.
Create copy.
304 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selective Color
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
1
2
3
Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the
retouch menu and press 2.
Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph and press J
(to view the highlighted photograph
full frame, press and hold the X
button).
Select a color.
Use the multi selector to position the
cursor over an object and press A
(L) to select the color of the object
as one that will remain in the final
copy (the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color). To zoom in on the
picture for precise color selection,
press X. Press W (Q) to zoom out.
A (L) button
Selected color
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
5
Highlight the color range.
Rotate the command dial to
highlight the color range for
the selected color.
Color range
Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final photograph.
Choose from values between 1 and 7;
note that higher values may include
hues from other colors.
6
7
Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the command dial to
highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top
of the display and repeat
Steps 3–5 to select another color. Repeat for a third color if
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press O (To
remove all colors, press and hold O. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; select Yes).
Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
306 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Painting
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy which emphasizes detail
and color for a painterly effect. Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Before
After
Side-by-side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by
pressing the P button and selecting Retouch when a copy or
original is played back full frame.
1
Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a
N icon) or a photograph that has
been retouched in full-frame
playback. Press P, then highlight
Retouch and press 2.
P button
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison
in the retouch menu and press J.
Compare the copy with the original.
The source image is displayed on the
left, the retouched copy on the right,
with the options used to create the
copy listed at the top of the display.
Press 4 or 2 to switch between the
sourceimage andtheretouchedcopy.
To view the highlighted picture full
frame, press and hold the X button. If
the copy was created from two
Options used to create
copy
Source
image
Retouched
copy
images using Image overlay, press 1
or 3 to view the other source image. If multiple copies exist
for the current source image, press 1 or 3 to view the other
copies. Press J to return to playback with the highlighted
image displayed.
D Side-by-side comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted or that was protected when
308 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
m Recent Settings/O My Menu
Both recent settings, a menu listing the 20 most recently used
settings, and My Menu, a custom menu listing up to 20 user-
selected options, can be accessed by pressing the G button
highlighting the last tab in the menu list (either m or O).
G button
Choosing a Menu
Use the Choose tab option to choose the menu displayed.
1
Select Choose tab.
Highlight Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight O MY MENU or m RECENT
SETTINGS and press J to display the
selected menu.
m Recent Settings/O My Menu 309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
m Recent Settings
When m RECENT SETTINGS is selected
for Choose tab, the menu lists the 20
most recently used settings, with the
most recently-used items first. Press 1 or
3 to highlight an option and press 2 to
select.
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O
again to delete the selected item.
O My Menu
Selecting O MY MENU for Choose tab lets you access a
customized menu of up to 20 options selected from the
playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.
Follow the steps below to add items to, delete items from, and
reorder items in My Menu.
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1
2
Select Add items.
Highlight Add items and press 2.
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the option you wish to add
and press 2.
310 m Recent Settings/O My Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press J.
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up
or down in My Menu. Press J to add
the new item. Repeat steps 1–4 to
select additional items.
A Adding Options to My Menu
The items currently displayed in My Menu
are indicated by a check mark. Items
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.
m Recent Settings/O My Menu 311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1
2
Select Remove items.
Highlight Remove items and press 2.
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select
or deselect. Selected items are
indicated by a check mark.
3
Delete the selected items.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
312 m Recent Settings/O My Menu
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1
2
Select Rank items.
Highlight Rank items and press 2.
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move
and press J.
3
4
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or
down in My Menu and press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My
Menu.
G button
m Recent Settings/O My Menu 313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the
camera.
Compatible Lenses
Compatible CPU Lenses
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses
only. AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-I lenses
names beginning with AF-I. Autofocus is not supported with
other autofocus (AF) lenses. The following table lists the features
available with compatible lenses in viewfinder photography:
Camera setting
Shooting
mode
Focus mode
Metering system
MF (with
electronic
AF rangefinder) MF
L
M
Other
N
Lens/accessory
M
modes 3D Color
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
z
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
z1
z1
z1
z1
z1
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR
PC-E NIKKOR series 2, 3
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 5
z
z4
z4
z7
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter 6 z7
Other AF NIKKOR (except
lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
—
z8
z9
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
✔
✔
z1
z1
—
z
1
2
The tilt knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the
lens is revolved.
314 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
5
Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.
Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not
shifted or tilted.
6
7
8
AF-S or AF-I lens required.
With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or
AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the
in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the
viewfinder is not in focus. Focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.
With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
9
• Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies
are recorded at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.
D IX NIKKOR Lenses
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
A Identifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G,
E, and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are
not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring
CPU lens
Type G or E lens
Type D lens
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the
aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).
A Matrix Metering
For matrix metering, the camera uses a 2016-pixel RGB sensor to set
exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with
type G, E, or D lenses, distance information (3D color matrix metering
II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering II;
which does not include 3D distance information).
Technical Notes 315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode
M. Selecting another mode disables the shutter release.
Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring
and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other
features requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU
lenses can not be used; see “Incompatible Accessories and
Non-CPU Lenses,” below.
Camera setting
Focus mode
MF (with
Shooting mode
electronic
AF rangefinder)
Other
modes
Lens/accessory
MF
M
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon
Series E lenses
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4
Reflex NIKKOR
—
z1
z
z2
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
z4
z5
z
z
z
z
z2, 3
z2
z2
—
—
—
—
PC NIKKOR
AI-type Teleconverter
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment 6
Auto extension rings (PK-series
11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)
z2
—
—
z1
z1
z
z
z2
z2
—
—
1
2
3
4
5
6
With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Exposure indicator can not be used.
Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).
316 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with
the D5500:
• TC-16A AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5,
600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)
Technical Notes 317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D AF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of
18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist illumination is not
available with the following lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
318 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the
AF-assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is
poor:
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
• AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G
• AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.8G
• AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED
Technical Notes 319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of
18–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to
entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to
shadows cast by the lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that
block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere
with red-eye reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
Shadow
Vignetting
The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the
macro range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light
the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those
given below:
Zoom
Minimum distance
Lens
position without vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
24 mm
24 mm
35 mm
24–85 mm
28 mm
35 mm
28 mm
35 mm
45–55 mm
24 mm
28 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
35 mm
24 mm
28–35 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED
320 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom
Minimum distance
Lens
position without vignetting
18 mm
24–70 mm
18 mm
24 mm
35–105 mm
18 mm
24–135 mm
24 mm
35–140 mm
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
35–200 mm
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR
AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED
35–300 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
35–300 mm
20 mm
No vignetting
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
24 mm
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF
28 mm
35 mm
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED
24 mm
35 mm
50–70 mm
24 mm
28–120 mm
24 mm
28–120 mm
35 mm
50–70 mm
28 mm
35 mm
50–300 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
Technical Notes 321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom
Minimum distance
Lens
position without vignetting
200 mm
250 mm
300 mm
24 mm
4.0 m/13 ft 2 in.
3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.
2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.
3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED,
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *
*
When not shifted or tilted.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.
A Calculating Angle of View
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The
size of the area exposed by the D5500, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm,
meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5
times that of the D5500. The approximate focal length of lenses for the
D5500 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal
length of the lens by about 1.5.
Picture size (35mm format)
(36 × 24 mm)
Picture diagonal
Lens
Picture size (D5500)
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)
Angle of view (35mm format)
Angle of view (D5500)
322 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in
flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative
Lighting System (CLS)
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
Flash unit
Feature
Guide No. (ISO 100) 5 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 24/78 21/69 18/59 10/33
1
If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or N (flash) is
selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white
balance appropriately.
2
3
4
Users of the LED light can set camera white balance to v or N for optimal results.
Wireless flash control is not available.
Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash unit or
SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
5
m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head
position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a
•
CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a
commander for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups.
The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
A The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units for
improved flash photography. Refer to the documentation provided
with the flash unit for details.
Technical Notes 323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture. If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet,
111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two
(approximately 1.4).
324 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for
digital SLR
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for
digital SLR
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
1
i-TTL
z2
z2
AA Auto aperture
Non-TTL auto
GN Distance-priority manual
Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
z3
z3
z
z
z
z
z
—
z6
z
z
z
z
z
z6
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
—
—
z
—
— z4
— z4
—
—
—
z4
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
M
— z4 z4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control
AA Auto aperture
—
—
—
— z5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
M
Non-TTL auto
Manual
— z4
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
[A:B] Quick wireless flash control
AA Auto aperture
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
A
M
Non-TTL auto
Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Technical Notes 325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Information Communication (flash)
Color Information Communication (LED light)
AF-assist for multi-area AF
Red-eye reduction
Camera flash mode selection
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
— z7
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
—
z
—
—
—
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z8
Camera flash unit firmware update
1
2
3
Not available with spot metering.
Can also be selected with flash unit.
AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. “A” will be selected
when a non-CPU lens is used.
4
5
6
7
8
Available only during close-up photography.
Non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
Available only in commander mode.
Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
326 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and
manual modes. Use with the camera in exposure mode S or M
and a shutter speed of 1/200 s or slower selected.
Flash unit
SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-30, SB-27 2,
SB-23,
SB-22S, SB-22, SB-29 3,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-20, SB-16B, SB-21B 3,
Flash mode
A
M
SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX 1
SB-15
z
SB-29S 3
—
z
Non-TTL auto
Manual
Repeating flash
z
z
z
z
—
z
—
z
z
G
—
z
—
z
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4
1
2
Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.
Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A
(non-TTL auto flash).
3
4
Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be
connected via a sync cable.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-
authorized service representative for more information.
Technical Notes 327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash
unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. The D5500 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %,
and 3, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the
built-in flash can not be used.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800. At high ISO sensitivities, noise (lines) may appear in photos
taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower
value. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at
some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator flashes
for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired
at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-
compatible flash units only; for information on the exposure and flash
charge indicators on other units, see the manual provided with the
flash).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard
i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or
SB-600 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander are used
to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the information display.
328 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400
provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following
restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with
17–135 mm AF lenses, however,
17–19 mm
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
20–105 mm
106–135 mm
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available with
24–105 mm AF lenses, however,
24–34 mm
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
24–135 mm
available only with the focus points
shown at right.
Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
Technical Notes 329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available
for the D5500.
EN-EL14a batteries are available from local retailers and
Nikon-authorized service representatives. EN-EL14
batteries can also be used.
EN-EL14 batteries.
• Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories
can be used to power the camera for extended periods
(EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). A power
connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to
Accessory shoe Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1: A cover protecting the accessory
covers
Filters
shoe. The accessory shoe is used for optional flash units.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
• The D5500 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.
Use C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters instead.
• NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or
when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,
ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter
manual for details.
330 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or
interfering with exposure.
• DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with
diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1
when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the
neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction
lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with
the built in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to
+0.5 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before
purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used with
eyepiece correction lenses.
• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in
the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during
focusing. Eyepiece adapter required (available
separately). Note that because the DG-2 interferes with
the eye sensor, you may find it necessary to select Off
for the Info display auto off item in the setup menu
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier. The monitor can not be rotated
with the adapter in place.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a
right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the
image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to
the lens (for example, from directly above when the
camera is horizontal). The monitor can not be rotated
with the attachment in place. In addition, because the
DR-6 interferes with the eye sensor, you may find it
necessary to select Off for the Info display auto off
item in the setup menu when this accessory is attached.
Technical Notes 331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer to record movies and photographs and save
photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the
supported operating systems. At default settings, Nikon
Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to
Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to
an account on the computer and the computer is
connected to the Internet. A message is automatically
displayed when an update is found.
Body cap
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the
mirror, viewfinder screen, and image sensor free of dust
when a lens is not in place.
Remote
controls/
wireless
remote
CR2025 battery.
controller
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q),
insert a fingernail into the gap and open the battery
chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the
correct orientation (r).
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10
wireless remote controller is attached, the camera can
be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless remote
function as either a transmitter or a receiver and is used
in combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or
WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a WR-1
can be connected to the accessory terminal for use as a
receiver, allowing the shutter to be released remotely by
another WR-1 acting as a transmitter.
332 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessory
terminal
accessories
The D5500 is equipped with
an accessory terminal for
WR-1 and WR-R10 wireless
and GP-1/GP-1A GPS units
with the H mark on the connector aligned with the F
next to the accessory terminal (close the connector cover
when the terminal is not in use).
connector
accessories
UC-E23 cable is not available for separate purchase;
purchase UC-E6 cables instead.
• EG-CP16 audio/video cables
HDMI cables HDMI Cable HC-E1: An HDMI cable with a type C connector
for connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to HDMI devices.
A Optional Accessories
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or
brochures for the latest information.
Technical Notes 333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approved Memory Cards
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in the camera. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds
are recommended for movie recording. Recording may end
unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.
SD memory
cards
2 GB 1
—
SDXC memory
cards 3
64 GB, 128 GB
64 GB
SDHC memory cards 2
SanDisk
Toshiba
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB
Panasonic
48 GB, 64 GB
2 GB 1
Lexar Media
Platinum II
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
—
64 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
64 GB, 128 GB,
256 GB
—
Professional
Full-HD Video
—
1
2
3
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB
cards.
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-
compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card
will be used are SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above
cards, please contact the manufacturer.
334 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power
connector and AC adapter.
1
Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber
(q) and power connector
(w) covers.
2
Insert the EP-5A power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the
orientation shown, using the
connector to keep the orange battery
latch pressed to one side. Be sure the
connector is fully inserted.
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power
connector cable so that it
passes through the power
connector slot and close
the battery-chamber cover.
Technical Notes 335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Connect the EH-5b AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC
adapter (e) and the power cable to the DC socket (r). A P
icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered
by the AC adapter and power connector.
336 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
•
•
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
•
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently
with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach
or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important:
Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause
damage not covered under warranty.
Camera body
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust
Lens, mirror, and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the
and can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with
a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as
Monitor
this could result in damage or malfunction.
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Technical Notes 337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
Holding the camera base down, select
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,
then highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check the image sensor
and then begin cleaning. 1 flashes in
the viewfinder and other operations can
not be performed while cleaning is in
progress. Do not remove or disconnect
the power source until cleaning ends and
the setup menu is displayed.
338 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1
Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Select Clean image sensor, then
highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2
Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
Choose from Clean at startup, Clean
at shutdown, Clean at startup &
shutdown, and Cleaning off.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor
cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not
be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu,
authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
Technical Notes 339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor
using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu
below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and
easily damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned
only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
1
Charge the battery.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the image sensor. Be sure the battery is fully
charged before proceeding.
2
3
Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and highlight
Lock mirror up for cleaning in the
setup menu and press 2 (note that
this option is not available at battery
levels of H or below).
4
5
Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor.
Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down. The mirror will be
raised and the shutter curtain will
open, revealing the image sensor.
340 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
7
Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
interior of the camera for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present,
proceed to Step 8.
Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower. Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor. Dirt that can not
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or
wipe the sensor.
8
Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close
automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End
cleaning or inspection immediately.
Technical Notes 341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the
sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be
retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging
applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
342 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with
the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the
product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while
the AC adapter is connected.
Technical Notes 343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
the image sensor.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and
easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the
curtain.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
344 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the
device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an
image containing a regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave
in cloth or windows in a building, with the camera image sensor grid. If
you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance to the
subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject
and the camera.
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
manual. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and
storing it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C
(59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations). Repeat this
process at least once every six months.
Technical Notes 345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature
is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C
(41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures
from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or
above 60 °C (140 °F).
• If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the
problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger
to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.
• Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
346 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on
important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase
replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully
charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a
spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.
Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
Technical Notes 347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Settings
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each
mode. Note that some settings may be unavailable depending
on the options selected.
l,
m,
k, r,
p, t,
n, u,
o, v,
s, x,
P, S , w, y,
1,
2,
3
S,
T
i
—
—
—
j
—
—
—
A, M
z
0
z
%
—
—
—
—
U
'
(
3
ISO sensitivity
White balance
Set Picture Control
Active D-Lighting
HDR (high dynamic
range)
z 1 z 1
z 1 z 1 z 1 z 1 z 1 z 1
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
2
2
2
—
—
z — 2
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Focus mode
(viewfinder)
AF-area mode
(viewfinder)
Focus mode (live
view/movie)
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
AF-area mode (live
view/movie)
z 3
z 3 z 3
z 3
348 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
l,
m,
k, r,
p, t,
n, u,
o, v,
s, x,
1,
2,
3
P, S , w, y,
S,
T
—
—
—
i
—
—
—
j
—
—
—
A, M
z
0
z
—
—
z
%
—
—
—
U
—
—
—
'
—
—
—
(
—
—
—
3
—
—
—
Metering
Bracketing
Flash compensation
—
—
z
—
—
—
z
z
Exposure
compensation
Flash mode
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z 4
—
—
z
z
z
a3: Built-in AF-assist
illuminator
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
z
z
z 5 z 6
—
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
e1: Flash cntrl for
built-in flash/
Optional flash
—
—
—
—
e2: Auto bracketing
set
1
2
3
4
5
6
Auto ISO sensitivity control is not available.
Fixed at Auto.
Subject-tracking AF is not available.
Not available in 0 mode.
Not available in w mode.
Available only in x, y, and z modes.
Technical Notes 349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power
source.
contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the
diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the
viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is
pressed halfway or eye sensor has turned display off. If information
display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-
release button or uncover eye sensor, confirm that On is selected for
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness
of this display vary with temperature.
350 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is
highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and
do not indicate a malfunction.
Shooting (All Modes)
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting
93).
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and
vertical frame coverage is approximately 95%.
Photos are out of focus:
• AF-S or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S or AF-I lens or focus manually.
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L)
button to lock focus when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus
Technical Notes 351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Can not select focus point:
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus
camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. If an option other than
e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus
• The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.
• Off is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator,
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot
with continued use; wait for it to cool down.
Camera is slow to record photos:
• Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance,
memory card access lamp may light for up to about a minute after
shooting ends in continuous release modes.
Randomly-spaced bright pixels appear in photos:
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on
• Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise
352 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:
• Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3),
• Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.
Can not choose a release mode: Release mode selection is not available when
off automatically when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
Beep does not sound:
• MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
If live view or movie recording does not start when you attempt to start
live view, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note
that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a
malfunction.
Technical Notes 353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image artifacts appear during live view: The temperature of the camera’s
internal circuits may rise during live view, causing image “noise” in the
form of bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog. Exit live view
when the camera is not in use.
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option
for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or
other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie
recording.
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Shutter-release disabled:
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected
• If white-balance bracketing is active, shutter release will be disabled
and viewfinder exposure-count display will flash if there is insufficient
space on memory card to record all images in bracketing sequence.
Insert new memory card.
Full range of shutter speeds not available:
• When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in
the shooting menu, the range of available shutter speed varies with the
Can not select desired aperture: Range of available apertures varies with lens
used.
Colors are unnatural:
354 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not
White balance bracketing unavailable: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a
Exposure compensation can not be used: Camera is in mode M. Choose another
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long
Playback
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
Can not delete picture:
Technical Notes 355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera
Can not change print order:
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG
copy using NEF (RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print
Picture is not displayed on TV:
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
• Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in
documentation provided with the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or
transfer software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer.
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Image Dust
Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party
software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting,
356 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
Miscellaneous
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
Technical Notes 357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the viewfinder and monitor.
A Warning Icons
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a
warning or error message can be displayed in the monitor by pressing
the W (Q) button.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Lock lens aperture ring
at minimum aperture
(largest f/-number).
Set lens aperture ring to
minimum aperture (highest
f-number).
• Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.
select mode M.
B
(flashes)
F/s
(flashes)
Lens not attached
A lens with a retractable lens
barrel button is attached with
the lens barrel retracted. Press
Before taking photos,
rotate the zoom ring
to extend the lens.
F
(flashes) the retractable lens barrel
button and rotate the zoom
ring to extend the lens.
Shutter release
disabled. Recharge
battery.
d/s
Turn camera off and recharge
(flashes) or replace battery.
This battery cannot be
used. Choose battery
designated for use in
this camera.
d
(flashes)
Initialization error.
Turn camera off and
then on again.
Turn camera off, remove and
camera on again.
d/k
(flashes)
358 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Battery level is low.
Complete operation
and turn camera off
immediately.
End cleaning and turn camera
off and recharge or replace
battery.
—
32,
Clock not set
—
Set camera clock.
No memory card
inserted
S/s Turn camera off and confirm
(flashes) that card is correctly inserted.
Memory card is locked (write
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write”
position.
(
protected). Slide card write-
(flashes) protect switch to “write”
position.
• Use approved card.
• Format card. If problem
persists, card may be
damaged. Contact Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
• Error creating new folder.
Delete files or insert new
memory card.
• Insert new memory card.
• Eye-Fi card is still emitting
wireless signal after Disable
has been selected for Eye-Fi
upload. To terminate
wireless transmission, turn
the camera off and remove
the card.
28,
This memory card
cannot be used. Card
may be damaged.
Insert another card.
(/k
(flashes)
Technical Notes 359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Eye-Fi card is locked (write
Not available if Eye-Fi
card is locked.
(/k protected). Slide card write-
(flashes) protect switch to “write”
position.
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
Format card or turn camera
off and insert new memory
card.
T
(flashes)
28,
• Reduce quality or size.
j/A/s
Card is full
• Delete photographs.
(flashes)
• Insert new memory card.
Camera can not focus using
autofocus. Change
(flashes) composition or focus
manually.
●
—
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity.
• Use commercial ND filter.
• In mode:
S
Increase shutter speed
Subject is too bright
A Choose a smaller
aperture (higher
f-number)
% Choose another
shooting mode
s
(flashes)
• Use flash.
• In mode:
Subject is too dark
S
Lower shutter speed
(lower f-number)
360 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
A/s
(flashes)
&/s
(flashes)
A/s
(flashes)
&/s
No “Bulb” in S mode
No “Time” in S mode
No “Bulb” in HDR mode
Change shutter speed or
select mode M.
• Change shutter speed.
No “Time” in HDR
mode
• Turn HDR off.
(flashes)
Menus and playback are not
available while interval timer
photography is in progress. To
pause, press J.
Interval timer
shooting
—
Flash has fired at full power.
Check photo in monitor; if
(flashes) underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
• Use the flash.
N
—
—
sensitivity.
• Lens focal length is less than
18 mm: use a longer focal
length.
• Optional SB-400 or SB-300
flash unit attached: flash is in
bounce position or focus
distance is very short.
Continue shooting; if
necessary, increase focus
distance to prevent
—
N/s
(flashes)
—
—
shadows from appearing in
photograph.
Technical Notes 361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Release shutter. If error
persists or appears frequently,
consult Nikon-authorized
service representative.
Error. Press shutter
release button again.
—
O
(flashes)
Start-up error. Contact
a Nikon-authorized
service
representative.
Metering error
Unable to start live
view.
Consult Nikon-authorized
service representative.
—
Wait for the internal circuits to
cool before resuming live
view or movie recording.
—
—
Please wait for camera
to cool.
Folder selected for playback
contains no images. Select
folder containing images
from Playback folder menu
or insert memory card
Folder contains no
images.
28,
containing images.
Cannot display this
file.
File can not be played back on
camera.
Images created with other
devices can not be retouched.
• Movies created with other
devices can not be edited.
seconds long.
Memory card does not
—
—
—
Cannot select this file.
This movie cannot be
edited.
—
—
No image for
retouching.
contain NEF (RAW) images for
use with NEF (RAW)
processing.
362 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Monitor
Viewfinder
Solution
0
Multiple smart devices are
attempting to connect to
camera simultaneously. Wait
a few minutes before trying
again.
Could not connect;
multiple devices
detected. Try again
later.
—
Select Disable for Wi-Fi >
Network connection, then
select Enable again.
Turn camera off and try again
after waiting for camera to
cool.
Check printer. To resume,
select Continue (if available).
Paper is not selected size.
Insert paper of correct size
and select Continue.
Clear jam and select
Continue.
Insert paper of selected size
and select Continue.
Check ink. To resume, select
Continue.
Replace ink and select
Continue.
Error
—
—
Network access not
available until camera
cools.
—
—
—
*
Check printer.
—
*
Check paper.
—
*
Paper jam.
—
—
—
—
—
*
Out of paper.
Check ink supply.
Out of ink.
—
*
—
*
—
* See printer manual for more information.
Technical Notes 363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D5500 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Effective angle of view
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)
Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to
approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle
of view
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
24.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor
24.78 million
Dust-reduction System
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off
reference data (Capture NX-D software
required)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
• 6000 × 4000 (Large)
• 4496 × 3000 (Medium)
• 2992 × 2000 (Small)
File format
• NEF (RAW): 12- or 14 bit, compressed
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC
and SDXC memory cards
Picture Control System
Media
File system
DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge
364 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex
viewfinder
Frame coverage
Magnification
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical
Approx. 0.82× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,
–1.0 m–1
)
Eyepoint
17 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
Reflex mirror
–1.7–+0.5 m–1
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen
Quick return
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses
Autofocus is available with AF-S and AF-I lenses.
Autofocus is not available with other type G and
D lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and lenses for
the F3AF are not supported), and AI-P lenses.
Non-CPU lenses can be used in mode M, but the
camera exposure meter will not function.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or
faster.
Shutter
Type
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-
plane shutter
Speed
Flash sync speed
1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV; Bulb; Time
X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or
slower
Technical Notes 365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Release
Release mode
8 (single frame), ! (continuous L),
9 (continuous H), J (quiet shutter release),
E (self-timer), " (delayed remote; ML-L3),
# (quick-response remote; ML-L3); interval
timer photography supported
Frame advance rate
• !: Up to 3 fps
• 9: Up to 5 fps (JPEG and 12-bit NEF/RAW) or
4 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW)
Note: Frame rates assume continuous-servo AF,
manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a
shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, Release
selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection), and other settings at default values.
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures
Self-timer
Exposure
Metering mode
TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor
Metering method
• Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II
(type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix
metering II (other CPU lenses)
• Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given
to 8-mm circle in center of frame
• Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about
2.5% of frame) centered on selected focus
point
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens, • Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
20 °C/68 °F) • Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling CPU
366 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure
Mode
Auto modes (i auto; j auto, flash off);
programmed auto with flexible program (P);
shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto
(A); manual (M); scene modes (k portrait;
l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up;
o night portrait; r night landscape; s party/
indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/
dawn; w pet portrait; x candlelight; y blossom;
z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes
(% night vision; S super vivid; T pop; U photo
illustration; ' toy camera effect; ( miniature
effect; 3 selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high
key; 3 low key)
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of
1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, M, h, and % modes
Exposure bracketing
White balance bracketing 3 shots in steps of 1
3 shots in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
ADL bracketing
Exposure lock
2 shots
Luminosity locked at detected value with
A (L) button
ISO 100 – 25600 in steps of 1/3 EV. Auto ISO
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure sensitivity control available
Index)
Active D-Lighting
Y Auto, Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal,
R Low, ! Off
Focus
Autofocus
Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor
module with TTL phase detection, 39 focus
points (including 9 cross-type sensor), and
AF-assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/
1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)
Detection range
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Technical Notes 367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C
selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking
activated automatically according to subject
status
• Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
Focus point
AF-area mode
Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamic-
area AF, 3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
A (L) button
Focus lock
Flash
Built-in flash
i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, ' : Auto flash
with auto pop-up
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release
Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Guide Number
Flash control
TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor is available with built-in flash; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with
matrix and center-weighted metering, standard
i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow
sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fill-
flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync
with red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow
sync, rear-curtain sync, off
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Flash-ready indicator
Can be adjusted by –3 – +1 EV in increments of
1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, M, and h modes
Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit
is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full
output
368 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with
System (CLS)
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 as a
master flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash
Color Information Communication supported
with all CLS-compatible flash units
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available
separately)
Sync terminal
White balance
White balance
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct
sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual, all
except preset manual with fine-tuning.
Live view
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-
servo AF (AF-F)
• Manual focus (MF)
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,
subject-tracking AF
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera
selects focus point automatically when face-
priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
AF-area mode
Autofocus
Automatic scene selection Available in i and j modes
Movie
Metering
TTL exposure metering using main image
sensor
Metering method
Matrix
Technical Notes 369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Movie
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
• 1920 × 1080, 60p (progressive)/50p/30p/25p/
24p, ★ high/normal
• 1280 × 720, 60p/50p, ★ high/normal
• 640 × 424, 30p/25p, ★ high/normal
Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps)
and 60p (actual frame rate 59.94 fps) are
available when NTSC is selected for video
mode. 25p and 50p are available when PAL is
selected for video mode. Actual frame rate
when 24p is selected is 23.976 fps.
MOV
File format
Video compression
Audio recording format
Audio recording device
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Linear PCM
Built-in or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
ISO sensitivity
ISO 100–25600
Monitor
Monitor
8.1 cm/3.2-in. (3 : 2), approx. 1037k-dot (720 ×
480 × 3 = 1,036,800 dots), TFT vari-angle LCD
touch screen with 170 ° viewing angle, approx.
100% frame coverage, brightness adjustment,
and eye-sensor controlled on/off
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 12, or 80 images or
calendar) playback with playback zoom, movie
playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, auto image
rotation, picture rating, and image comment
(up to 36 characters)
370 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interface
USB
Hi-Speed USB; connection to built-in USB port
is recommended
Video output
NTSC, PAL
HDMI output
Type C HDMI connector
Accessory terminal
Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10
(available separately)
Remote cords: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS units: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter);
supports optional ME-1 stereo microphones
Audio input
Wireless
Standards
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g
Communications protocols • IEEE 802.11b: DSSS/CCK
• IEEE 802.11g: OFDM
2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11)
Operating frequency
Range (line of sight)
Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles)
54 Mbps
Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE
standard. Actual rates may differ.
• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
• Encryption: AES
Data rate
Security
Wireless setup
Supports WPS
Access protocols
Infrastructure
Technical Notes 371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supported languages
Supported languages
Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi,
Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,
Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil,
Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
Power source
Battery
AC adapter
One EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion battery
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power
connector (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 124 × 97 × 70 mm (4.9 × 3.9 × 2.8 in.)
Weight
Approx. 470 g (1 lb 0.6 oz) with battery and
memory card but without body cap; approx.
420 g/14.9 oz (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in
this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
372 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ MH-24 Battery Charger
Rated input
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum
Rated output
DC 8.4 V/0.9 A
Supported batteries
Charging time
Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a
Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.),
excluding plug adapter
Weight
Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter
❚❚ EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
7.2 V/1230 mAh
0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)
Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover
Technical Notes 373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II Lens
Type
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length
18–55 mm
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
f/3.5–5.6
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical
lens element)
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Distance information
Zoom
76 °–28 ° 50 ´
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)
Output to camera
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Focusing
Vibration reduction
all zoom positions
• MF: 0.25 m (0.82 ft) from focal plane at all zoom
positions
Diaphragm blades
Diaphragm
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Fully automatic
Aperture range
• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Full aperture
Metering
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
52 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Approx. 66 mm diameter × 59.5 mm (distance
from camera lens mount flange when lens is
retracted)
Weight
Approx. 195 g (6.9 oz)
374 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lens
Type
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length
18–140 mm
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
f/3.5–5.6
17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens
element, 1 aspherical lens element)
76° – 11° 30 ´
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)
Output to camera
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
zoom positions
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Distance information
Zoom
Focusing
Vibration reduction
Minimum focus distance
Diaphragm blades
Diaphragm
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Fully automatic
Aperture range
• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Full aperture
Metering
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)
Weight
Technical Notes 375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II Lens
Type
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length
55–200 mm
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
f/4–5.6
13 elements in 9 groups (including 1 ED lens
element)
Angle of view
28° 50 ´ – 8°
Focal length scale
Graduated in millimeters (55, 70, 85, 105, 135,
200)
Distance information
Zoom
Focusing
Output to camera
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
positions
Vibration reduction
Minimum focus distance
Diaphragm blades
Diaphragm
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Fully automatic
Aperture range
• 55 mm focal length: f/4–22
• 200 mm focal length: f/5.6–32
Full aperture
Metering
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
52 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 70.5 mm maximum diameter × 83 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange when
lens is retracted)
Weight
Approx. 300 g (10.6 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in
this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
376 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lenses
This section describes the features available with AF-S DX
NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II, AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, and AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED
VR II lenses. The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative
purposes is the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II.
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
Focal length mark
Lens mounting mark
Focal length scale
Retractable lens barrel
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Vibration reduction ON/OFF
Technical Notes 377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
Focal length mark
Lens mounting mark
Focal length scale
Lens cap
Rear lens cap
Vibration reduction ON/OFF
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II
Focal length mark
Focal length scale
Lens mounting mark
Retractable lens barrel
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Vibration reduction
378 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II, AF-S DX NIKKOR
18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, and AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm
f/4–5.6G ED VR II are for use exclusively with Nikon DX format
digital cameras. The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
and AF-S NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II feature
retractable lens barrels.
Technical Notes 379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
The lenses described in this section support vibration reduction
(VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the
camera is panned, allowing shutter speeds for DX format
cameras to be slowed by approximately 4.0 stops at maximum
zoom position (according to Camera and Imaging Products
Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the photographer
and shooting conditions). This increases the range of shutter
speeds available and permits hand-held, tripod-free
photography in a wide range of situations.
To use vibration reduction, slide the
vibration reduction switch to ON.
Vibration reduction is activated when the
shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, reducing the effects of camera
shake on the image in the viewfinder and
simplifying the process of framing the
subject and focusing in both autofocus
and manual focus modes. When the
camera is panned, vibration reduction
applies only to motion that is not part of
the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied
only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera
smoothly in a wide arc.
Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely
mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the tripod head is not
secured or when using a monopod.
380 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Vibration Reduction
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect.
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging.
When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction; wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
shooting.
D Lens Care
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol
or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean
the lens.
• The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens
element.
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible
pouch.
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or
camera using only the hood.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,
dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp
parts made from reinforced plastic.
Technical Notes 381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at
least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
Shadow
Vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II and
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II:
Camera
Minimum distance without vignetting
D7100/D7000/D5500/D5300/
D5200/D5100/D5000/D3300/
D3200/D3100/D3000/
D300 series/D200/D100/D90/
D80/D70 series/D60/D50/
D40 series
No vignetting at any focus
distance
382 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR:
Minimum distance
Zoom position without vignetting
Camera
D7100/D7000/D300 series/
D200/D100
18 mm
24–140 mm
18 mm
24 mm
35–140 mm
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
D90/D80/D50
D5500/D5300/D5200/D5100/
D5000/D3300/D3200/D3100/
D3000/D70 series/D60/
D40 series
18 mm
24 mm
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
35–140 mm
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the
angle of view of a lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting will
occur at a focal length of 18 mm.
Technical Notes 383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
• 52 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52
• Rear Lens Cap
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
• 52 mm screw-on filters
• LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815
• Bayonet Hood HB-69
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until
the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its
base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the
hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
384 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• 67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67
• Rear Lens Cap
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• 67 mm screw-on filters
• LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
• Bayonet Hood HB-32
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until
the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its
base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the
hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
Technical Notes 385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II
• 52mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52
• Rear Lens Cap
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED VR II
• 52 mm screw-on filters
• LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0915
• Bayonet Hood HB-37
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until
the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its
base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the
hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
When the hood is reversed, it can be attached and removed by
rotating it while holding it near the lock mark (—).
386 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A A Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses
Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those
shown below.
1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject:
If the focus point contains both
foreground and background
objects, the camera may focus on
the background and the subject
may be out of focus.
Example: A far-off portrait
subject at some distance from
the background
2 The subject contains many fine details.
The camera may have difficulty
focusing on subjects that lack
contrast or appear smaller than
objects in the background.
Example: A field of flowers
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another
subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For
A Focusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses
When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and
the lens A-M switch is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the
shutter-release button pressed halfway after the autofocus operation
is complete and manually rotating the focus ring. Do not rotate the
focus ring until the autofocus operation is complete. To refocus using
autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again.
Technical Notes 387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Supported Standards
•
•
•
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF)
is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to
ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide
standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders
stored on the memory card.
Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in
which information stored with photographs is used for
optimal color reproduction when the images are output on
Exif-compliant printers.
•
•
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with
the digital camera and printer industries, allowing
photographs to be output directly to a printer without first
transferring them to a computer.
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV
devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control
signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable
connection.
388 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PictBridge
logo is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of
the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance. All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the
other documentation provided with your Nikon product are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
A Conformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The HarfBuzz Project
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights
reserved.
Technical Notes 389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Certificates
390 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro 95 MB/s
SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size settings.
No. of
Buffer
Image quality
Image size
File size 1
24.4 MB
19.7 MB
images 1
capacity 2
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
—
—
428
511
10
14
Compressed, 12-bit
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
12.3 MB
7.9 MB
3.9 MB
6.1 MB
3.9 MB
2.1 MB
2.0 MB
1.5 MB
1.0 MB
929
1500
2900
1800
3000
5600
3500
5700
10300
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
1
2
All figures are approximate. Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene
recorded.
Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops when
Technical Notes 391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Life
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time
menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL14a (1230 mAh)
batteries are given below.
•
•
•
Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1):
Approximately 820 shots
Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2):
Approximately 3110 shots
Movies: Approximately 65 minutes at 1080/60p and 1080/50p 3
1
Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from
infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once
every 30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on; tester waits for
monitor to turn off; flash fired at full power once every other shot. Live view not
used.
2
Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
lens under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous
high-speed release mode, focus mode set to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG
basic, image size set to M (medium), white balance set to Auto, ISO sensitivity
set to ISO 100, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range
three times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six
shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on; cycle repeated once
monitor has turned off.
3
Measured at 23°C/73.4°F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and
an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under conditions specified
by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can
be up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these
limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
392 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following can reduce battery life:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using the monitor
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
Repeated autofocus operations
Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
Slow shutter speeds
Using the built-in Wi-Fi function or using an optional GP-1 or
GP-1A GPS unit or WR-R10/WR-1 wireless remote controller
Using an Eye-Fi card
•
•
Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL14a batteries:
•
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
•
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
Technical Notes 393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto distortion control...................245
Auto flash............................................... 94
Auto image rotation ........................235
Auto info display...............................278
Auto ISO sensitivity control ..........241
Auto off timers...................................253
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode) ........ 83
Autoexposure lock ...........................127
Auto-servo AF ...................................... 78
Available settings .............................348
Numerics
3D color matrix metering.............. 315
A
A/V cable ............................................. 220
Access lamp...........................................41
Accessories ......................................... 330
Accessory terminal .......................... 282
Accessory terminal accessories... 333
Active D-Lighting ............................. 133
Add items (My Menu) ..................... 310
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
B
Beep options ......................................276
Black-and-white ................................299
Border (PictBridge)...........................215
Adobe RGB.......................................... 243
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set).
AE lock.................................................. 127
AE-L ....................................................... 127
AF-A..........................................................78
AF-F ....................................................... 164
Angle of view..................................... 322
Aperture-priority auto.................... 118
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ............... 267
Assign touch Fn ................................ 268
Bulb........................................................121
Burst......................................................... 72
C
Calendar playback............................191
Camera Control Pro 2......................332
CEC.........................................................223
Choose start/end point ..................183
Clean image sensor..........................338
Clock battery ........................................ 33
Cloudy (White balance) ..................137
CLS .........................................................323
Color outline.......................................302
Color space .........................................243
Technical Notes 395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CPU contacts...................................... 315 Exposure lock.....................................127
CPU lens............................................... 314 Exposure meters................................. 44
Custom Settings............................... 246 Eye sensor ...................................... 9, 278
Cyanotype .......................................... 299
F
D
Date and time............................. 32, 275 File information.................................193
Date counter.............................256, 257 File naming.........................................240
Date stamp......................................... 256 Filter effects..................... 155, 157, 298
Daylight saving time................ 32, 275 Filters.....................................................330
Delete................................................... 205 Fisheye..................................................297
Delete all images.............................. 206 Flash ........................................44, 93, 323
D-Lighting........................................... 294 Flat (Set Picture Control)................152
DPOF...................................216, 218, 388 Flexible program ..............................116
E
396 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focal plane mark .................................89 Image size.............................................. 92
Focus lock ..............................................86 Info display format...........................277
Focusing the viewfinder...................33 ISO display...........................................252
Format.................................................. 272 i-TTL ............................................. 259, 260
Frame size/frame rate..................... 177
Front-curtain sync...............................96
Full-frame playback......................... 188
Full-time-servo AF............................ 164
SLR........................................................260
J
JPEG basic.............................................. 90
JPEG fine ................................................ 90
JPEG normal.......................................... 90
G
L
GPS unit ............................................... 283
Landscape (Set Picture Control)..152
H
H.264..................................................... 370 Large (Image size)............................... 92
HDMI............................................222, 388 Lens..............................29, 314, 377, 378
HDMI-CEC............................................ 223 Lens focus ring.................. 88, 377, 378
Help..........................................................14 Lens vibration reduction switch... 37,
High ISO NR........................................ 244 Location data ........................... 199, 283
Highlights...................................193, 234 Long exposure NR............................243
Histogram ..................................194, 234 Low-angle shots.....................................6
I
M
Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 279 Manual...........................................88, 119
Image overlay.................................... 300 Manual focus..................... 88, 164, 165
Image quality........................................90 Manual movie settings ...................179
Image review ..................................... 234 Matrix metering.................................125
Technical Notes 397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum aperture.............................89 Overview data....................................198
Maximum sensitivity....................... 241
Medium (Image size) .........................92
P
Memory buffer .....................................73
Memory card capacity.................... 391
Metering.............................................. 125
Microphone........................................ 178
Minimum shutter speed................ 241
Mired .................................................... 141
Mode dial ................................................. 4
Monitor brightness.......................... 276
Monochrome..................................... 299
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...
Page size (PictBridge)......................215
Painting................................................307
Playback...............................................188
Playback display options ...............234
Playback folder..................................234
Playback zoom ..................................200
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........152
Power switch........................................ 31
Movie quality..................................... 177
Movie settings................................... 177
My Menu ............................................. 310
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down .................................... 41
Press the shutter-release button
N
NEF (RAW)...........................90, 240, 289 Print (DPOF)...............................216, 219
NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 240 Print select ..........................................216
Network connection....................... 226 Printing.................................................214
Non-CPU lens..................................... 316
Normal-area AF................................. 166
Q
Number of focus points................. 249
Number of shots............................... 392
O
398 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shooting data ....................................196
Shooting menu..................................236
Shutter-priority auto........................117
R
Rangefinder........................................ 251
Rank items (My Menu).................... 313
Rear-curtain sync.................................96
Recent settings.................................. 309
Red-eye correction .......................... 295
Release mode .......................................71
Remote on duration (ML-L3)........ 254
Remote shutter release.................. 282
Remove items (My Menu) ............. 312
Reset custom settings .................... 248
Reset shooting menu...................... 237
Resize.................................................... 292
Retouch menu................................... 286
Reverse indicators............................ 258
RGB histogram .................................. 194
Shutter-release button AE-L .........252
Side-by-side comparison ...............307
Single frame (Release mode).......... 71
Single-point AF (AF-area mode).... 82
Skylight (Filter effects) ....................298
Slide show ...........................................208
Slot empty release lock...................281
Soft (Filter effects) ............................298
Special effects mode ......................... 61
Spot metering....................................125
sRGB.......................................................243
SSID........................................................229
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
Storage folder ....................................238
Straighten............................................296
Subject-tracking AF .........................166
S
Save selected frame ........................ 186
Scene auto selector ............................47
Scene mode ..........................................54
Select to send to smart device .... 231
Self-portrait ............................................. 6
Sepia ..................................................... 299
Set clock from satellite ................... 283
Set Picture Control........................... 154
Setup menu........................................ 270
Shade (White balance) ................... 137
T
Television.............................................220
Time.......................................................121
Time zone and date .........................275
Touch screen ........................................ 17
Technical Notes 399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touch Shutter.......................................21
Type E lens.......................................... 315
U
USB cable ............................................ 211
V
Vari-angle monitor ............................... 6
View SSID ............................................ 229
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ..................76
Vignette control ............................... 244
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 152
W
Warm filter (Filter effects).............. 298
WB.......................................................... 137
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
White balance ................................... 137
Wide-area AF ..................................... 166
400 Technical Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB4K01(11)
6MB25711-01
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|